Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder Series MY1 Technical Overview

P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.
3 2:19 PM Page 943
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder

Series MY1
MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
MY1H
High MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
High rigidity/ MY3B
Linear guide type
Series MY1HT MY3M
Linear guide type
Series MY1 H
Cam follower guide type
Series MY1 C
Slide bearing guide type
Series MY1 M
Basic type

Large
Series MY1 B

Series Variations Bore size (mm) Air Stroke Side Floating End (3)
adjusting Made to Order
(1)
10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 cushion Unit support bracket lock
Series Guide type Piping type
(2)
MY1B Basic type P. 951
Intermediate
stroke
MY1M Slide bearing guide type
Centralized
Long stroke
Helical insert thread
P. 975 D-
piping Dust seal band
MY1C Cam follower guide type NBR lining P. 995
Standard
piping
Holder mounting
bracket -X
MY1H Linear guide type P. 1015
Individual
MY1HT High rigidity/Linear guide type P. 1039 -X
Note 1) ø10 is available with central piping only. Note 2) ø10 is available with rubber bumper only. Technical
Note 3) Availability for made-to-order differs, depending on the size and the model. data
943
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:19 PM Page 944

Basic type Slide bearing type

"

Simple guide type
Wide variations from that can mount a
ø10 to ø100 workpiece directly.
Cam follower guide type Linear guide type

!

Strong against moment, Uses a linear
compatible with long guide to achieve
strokes high repeatability
Stroke availability Centralized piping

High rigidity/Linear guide type
%
# $

" !

Stroke adjusting unit Side support
(

• Adjusting bolt

• Low load shock absorber +
Adjusting bolt (L unit) Interchangeability
• Heavy-loaded shock absorber
&

Linear guide + Adjusting bolt (H unit)
Heavy loaded workpieces
'
can be accommodated by using
two linear guides. '
944
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 945
Height 27 mm
40
Basic type MY1 B10 30 Linear guide type MY1 H10

20 MY1B
10 MY1M
00
MY1C
The stroke adjusting unit (H unit) does not protrude above the table type.
MY1H
Even when equipped
10
Stroke adjusting unit can be
with a floating <Scale:100%> mounted MY1HT
28.5
bracket, the height 20

is only 28.5 mm.
Centralized
piping type MY1W
(Standard)
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
Uses two linear guides. MY3M
Maximum load mass of 320 kg. ( 63)

High rigidity/Linear guide type MY1 HT50/63
Extremely easy to maintain
It is possible to replace cylinders
with a workpiece being mounted.
Eyebolt mounting
threads are standard
for convenient instal-
lation.
Using eyebolts
End lock type introduced Lock pin
to series MY1H. Allows fine stroke control
Same dimensions as D-

standard
Possible to lock either on -X
one side or on both Individual
sides. -X
Technical
data
945
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 946
MY1
Series
Model Selection 1
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1 to your application.
Standards for Tentative Model Selection
Graphs for related M2 :

Cylinder model Guide type Standards for guide selection allowable values
Rolling
MY1B Basic type Guaranteed accuracy not required, generally combined with separate guide Refer to P. 952. M1: Pitching
MY1M Slide bearing guide type Slide table accuracy approx. ±0.12 mm (2)
Refer to P. 976.
MY1C Cam follower guide type Slide table accuracy approx. ±0.05 mm (2) Refer to P. 996.
MY1H Linear guide type Slide table accuracy of ±0.05 mm or less required (2) Refer to P. 1016.
MY1HT High rigidity/Linear guide type Slide table accuracy of ±0.05 mm or less required (2) Refer to P. 1040.
Note 1) These accuracy values for each guide should be used only as a guide during selection. Please
contact SMC when guaranteed accuracy for MY1C/MY1H is required.
Note 2) “Accuracy” here means displacement of the slide table (at stroke end) when 50% of the allowable
M3: Yawing
moment shown in the catalog is applied. (reference value).
Selection Flow Chart
Operating Conditions
Mounting Review the operating conditions.
m: Load mass (kg) orientation:
V: Speed (mm/s) Accuracy:
P: Operating pressure (MPa)
Tentative Selection of Cylinder Model

MY1B : Basic type
MY1M : Slide bearing guide type
MY1C : Cam follower guide type
MY1H : Linear guide type
MY1HT: High rigidity/Linear guide type
Select a guide suitable

for the application
Load mass NG Select larger cylinder size.

m ≤ m max
Change guide type.
OK
Determination of NG Select larger cylinder size.

allowable moment
[Σα] ≤ 1 Change guide type.
Select larger cylinder size.
OK
Examination of cushioning
mechanism at stroke end
NG Type L NG Type H NG External NG

Air cushion
Rubber bumper
stroke adjusting unit stroke adjusting unit cushioning unit ∗
OK OK OK OK
Examination of port variations and
auto switch mounting (type)
Standard type or Centralized piping type
∗ For external cushioning unit, the installation of a suitable cushioning mechanism near the
load center of gravity by the customer's side is recommended.
Model selected It is possible to select all models of mechanically jointed rodless cylinder (Series MY1)
according to the step indicated above.
Refer to the separate instruction manual for further details. If you have any questions,
please contact SMC.
946
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 947
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder Series MY1
Types of Moment Applied to Rodless Cylinders
Multiple moments may be generated depending on the mounting orientation, load, and position of the center of gravity.
z
Coordinates and Moments
M3: Yawing
MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
M1: Pitching MY1H
MY1HT
y
x M2: Rolling
MY1W
MY2C
Static Moment MY2H
MY3A
Horizontal mounting Ceiling mounting Wall mounting MY3B
MY3M
M1
M2
M3
M1 M2
X
y M2
Y
x z
m1 x g Y y x Z X
x X
m3 x g
m2 x g
Vertical mounting Mounting
orientation
Horizontal
mounting
Ceiling
mounting
Wall
mounting
Vertical
mounting
M3 Static load (m) m1 m2 m3 m4 Note)

M1
Static moment
M1 m1 x g x X m2 x g x X — m4 x g x Z
z M2 m1 x g x Y m2 x g x Y m3 x g x Z —
Y Z y
M3 — — m3 x g x X m4 x g x Y
m4 x g
Note) m4 is a mass movable by thrust. Use 0.3 to 0.7 times the
thrust (differs depending on the operating speed) as a guide
g: Gravitational acceleration for actual use.
Dynamic Moment
M1
Mounting Horizontal Ceiling Wall Vertical
orientation mounting mounting mounting mounting
Z
υa Dynamic load (FE) 1.4 υa x δ x mn x g
υa
Dynamic moment
1
M1E —
3
x FE x Z
M2E Dynamic moment M2E is not generated.

M1E
M3
1
D-
mn x g M3E mn x g M3E — x FE x Y
3
FE FE Note) Regardless of the mounting orientation, dynamic -X
Y moment is calculated with the formulae above.
Individual
g: Gravitational acceleration, υa: Average speed, δ: Damper coefficient -X
Technical
data
947
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 948
MY1
Series
Model Selection 2
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1 to your application.
Calculation of Guide Load Factor

1. Operating Conditions
Operating cylinder ··········· MY1H40-500
Mounting Orientation
Average operating speed υa ··· 300 mm/s 1. Horizontal
z 2. Wall y
mounting
Mounting orientation ··········· Wall mounting mounting
Cushion ································· Air cushion Wb: MGGLB25-200 (4.35 kg) P. 978
x
(δ = 1/100) y z
x
MY1H40-500
3. Ceiling x
mounting 4. Vertical
P. 998 mounting
Wc: MHL2-16D1 (795 g) P. 1042
y z y
x
z
Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (880 g) Wd: Workpiece (500 g)
For actual examples of calculation for each orientation,
refer to the pages above.
2. Load Blocking
42.5 150 Mass and Center of Gravity for Each Workpiece
5 65
Center of gravity
Workpiece no. Mass
Wn mn X-axis Y-axis Z-axis
Z Xn Yn Zn
X
Wa 0.88 kg 65 mm 0 mm 5 mm
111
Wb 4.35 kg 150 mm 0 mm 42.5 mm

210
Y
Y Wc 0.795 kg 150 mm 111 mm 42.5 mm
Wd 0.5 kg 150 mm 210 mm 42.5 mm
n = a, b, c, d
3. Composite Center of Gravity Calculation

m3 = Σmn
= 0.88 + 4.35 + 0.795 + 0.5 = 6.525 kg
X = 1 x ∑(mn x xn)
m3
1
= (0.88 x 65 + 4.35 x 150 + 0.795 x 150 + 0.5 x 150) = 138.5 mm
6.525
Y = 1 x ∑(mn x yn)
m3
1
= (0.88 x 0 + 4.35 x 0 + 0.795 x 111 + 0.5 x 210) = 29.6 mm
6.525
1
Z = x ∑(mn x zn)
m3
1
= (0.88 x 5 + 4.35 x 42.5 + 0.795 x 42.5 + 0.5 x 42.5) = 37.4 mm
6.525
4. Calculation of Load Factor for Static Load
m3: Mass
m3 max (from (1) of graph MY1H/m3) = 50 (kg) ································································
Load factor α1 = m3/m3 max = 6.525/50 = 0.13 m3
M2: Moment Z
M2 max (from (2) of graph MY1H/M2) = 50 (N·m) ······························································································
M2 = m3 x g x Z = 6.525 x 9.8 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 2.39 (N·m)
Load factor α 2 = M2/M2 max = 2.39/50 = 0.05 m3
M2
948
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 949
M3: Moment X
M3 max (from (3) of graph MY1H/M3) = 38.7 (N·m) ······································································

M3 = m3 x g x X = 6.525 x 9.8 x 138.5 x 10–3 = 8.86 (N·m) MY1B
m3
Load factor α 3 = M3/M3 max = 8.86/38.7 = 0.23 M3 MY1M
MY1C
5. Calculation of Load Factor for Dynamic Moment
Equivalent load FE at impact

MY1H
FE = 1.4υa x δ x m x g = 1.4 x 300 x
1 Z
MY1HT
x 6.525 x 9.8 = 268.6 (N)
100
M1E: Moment MY1W
M1E max (from (4) of graph MY1H/M1 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 35.9 (N·m) ·················· M1E
1 1 MY2C
M1E = x FE x Z = x 268.6 x 37.4 x 10 = 3.35 (N·m) –3
FE
3 3
Load factor α4 = M1E/M1E max = 3.35/35.9 = 0.09
M1 MY2H
MY3A
M3E: Moment MY3B
M3E max (from (5) of graph MY1H/M3 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 27.6 (N·m)······················· MY3M
M3E
1 1
M3E = x FE x Y = x 268.6 x 29.6 x 10 = 2.65 (N·m) –3
3 3
FE Y
M3
6. Sum and Examination of Guide Load Factors

∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 x α5 = 0.60 ≤ 1
The above calculation is within the allowable value, and therefore the selected model can be used.
Select a shock absorber separately.
In an actual calculation, when the sum of guide load factors ∑α in the formula above is more than 1, consider
decreasing the speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series.
This calculation can be easily made using the “SMC Pneumatics CAD System”.
Load Mass Allowable Moment

MY1H/m3 MY1H/M1 MY1H/M2 MY1H/M3
(1) 50
(2)
50 50
(4) 40
50 (3)
40 40 40
30
30
30
(5)
30
20
20 20
20
10 MY1H40
10
MY1H32 10
MY1H40
Load mass (kg)
MY1H40
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
MY1H32 5 MY1H32
10 MY1H40 MY1H25
4
5 5
MY1H32 MY1H25 3
4 MY1H20 4 MY1H25
MY1H25 3 2 3
5
4 2 MY1H20 2 MY1H20
MY1H20 1
3
MY1H16
1 1
2 MY1H16
MY1H10
MY1H16
0.5
0.4 MY1H16
D-
0.3 MY1H10
0.5 0.5
1
0.4 0.2 0.4
-X
0.3 0.3
0.2
MY1H10
0.1 0.2
MY1H10 Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 -X
Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s)
Technical
data
949
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 951
Series MY1
Basic Type
ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
B MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Minimizing the unit size (dimensions)
and combination with other guides is
possible.
Bearing
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
951
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 952
Series MY1B Prior to Use

Maximum Allowable Moment/Maximum Load Mass
Maximum Allowable Moment
Bore size Maximum allowable moment (N·m) Maximum load mass (kg) Select the moment from within the range
Model
(mm) M1 M2 M3 m1 m2 m3 of operating limits shown in the graphs.
10 0.8 0.1 0.3 5.0 1.0 0.5 Note that the maximum allowable load
16 2.5 0.3 0.8 15 3.0 1.7 value may sometimes be exceeded
even within the operating limits shown in
20 5.0 0.6 1.5 21 4.2 3.0
the graphs. Therefore, also check the
25 10 1.2 3.0 29 5.8 5.4
allowable load for the selected
32 20 2.4 6.0 40 8.0 8.8 conditions.
MY1B
40 40 4.8 12 53 10.6 14
50 78 9.3 23 70 14 20
63 160 19 48 83 16.6 29
80 315 37 95 120 24 42
100 615 73 184 150 30 60
The above values are the maximum allowable values for moment and load. Refer to each graph
regarding the maximum allowable moment and maximum allowable load for a particular piston speed.
Caution on Design
We recommend installing an external shock absorber when the cylinder is combined with
another guide (connection with floating bracket, etc.) and the maximum allowable load is
exceeded, or when the operating speed is 1000 to 1500 mm/s for bore sizes ø16, ø50, ø63, ø80
and ø100.
Load mass (kg)
m1
m2 m3
Moment (N·m)
F1 M1=F1 x L1 F2 M2=F2 x L2 F3 M3=F3 x L3
L2
L1
L3
Maximum Load Mass

Select the load from within the range of
limits shown in the graphs. Note that the
<Calculation of guide load factor> maximum allowable moment value may
1. Maximum allowable load (1), static moment (2), and dynamic moment (3) (at the time of impact with sometimes be exceeded even within the
stopper) must be examined for the selection calculations. operating limits shown in the graphs.
∗ To evaluate, use υa (average speed) for (1) and (2), and υ (collision speed υ = 1.4 υa) for (3). Calculate mmax Therefore, also check the allowable
for (1) from the maximum allowable load graph (m1, m2, m3) and Mmax for (2) and (3) from the maximum allowable
moment for the selected conditions.
moment graph (M1, M2, M3).
Σα = Maximum allowable load [mmax] + Allowable static moment [Mmax] +

Sum of guide Load mass [m] Static moment [M] (1) Dynamic moment [ME] (2)
load factors Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax]
≤1
Note 1) Moment caused by the load, etc., with cylinder in resting condition.
Note 2) Moment caused by the impact load equivalent at the stroke end (at the time of impact with stopper).
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the workpiece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum of the
load factors (Σα) is the total of all such moments.
2. Reference formula [Dynamic moment at impact]

Use the following formulae to calculate dynamic moment when taking stopper impact into
consideration.
m: Load mass (kg)
F: Load (N)
υ: Collision speed (mm/s)
,
L1: Distance to the load s center of gravity (m)
FE: Load equivalent to impact (at impact with stopper) (N)
υa: Average speed (mm/s) ME:Dynamic moment (N·m)
M: Static moment (N·m) δ: Damper coefficient
υ = 1.4υaNote(mm/s) FE = 1.4υa·δ·m·g
With rubber bumper = 4/100
Note 4)
(MY1B10, MY1H10)
∴ME = 1 ·FE· L1 = 4.57υaδmL,
5)
3
With air cushion = 1/100 υ
With shock absorber = 1/100
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) m FE
Note 4) 1.4υaδ is a dimensionless coefficient for calculating impact force.
L1
ME
Note 5) Average load coefficient (= 1
3 ): This coefficient is for averaging the maximum load
moment at the time of stopper impact according to service life calculations.
3. For detaild selection procedures, refer to pages 954 and 955.
952
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 953

Basic Type Series MY1B
MY1B/M1 MY1B/M2 MY1B/M3

200
500
400 50
40 100
300
30
200
20 50 MY1B
40
100 30
MY1B100 10 MY1B100 MY1B100 MY1M
20
50
40
30
MY1B80 5
4
MY1B80 MY1B80 MY1C
10
20 MY1B63 3
MY1B63 MY1H
N·m
N·m
N·m
MY1B63
2 5
10 MY1B50 4
MY1HT
Moment
Moment
Moment
MY1B50 3 MY1B50
1
5 MY1B40 2
4
3 0.5
MY1B40
MY1B40 MY1W
MY1B32 0.4
1
2 0.3 MY1B32 MY1B32 MY2C
MY1B25 0.2
1 0.5
MY1B25 0.4 MY1B25 MY2H
MY1B20 0.3
0.5 0.1
0.4 MY1B20 MY3A
0.3 MY1B16
0.2 MY1B20 MY3B
0.05
0.2
MY1B10
MY1B16
0.04
0.03
MY1B16
0.1 MY1B16 MY3M
0.1 0.02 MY1B10
MY1B16 0.06 MY1B10
MY1B16
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s
MY1B/m1 MY1B/m2 MY1B/m3

200 30
50
20 40
100 30
20
10
50
40 10
30 5 MY1B100
4 MY1B100
5 MY1B80
20 MY1B100 3 MY1B80
kg
kg
kg
4 MY1B63
MY1B80
MY1B63
Load mass
Load mass
Load mass
2 3
MY1B63 MY1B50 MY1B50
10 2
MY1B50 MY1B40 MY1B40
MY1B40 1 MY1B32
MY1B32
5 MY1B32 MY1B25 1
4 MY1B25 MY1B20 MY1B25
0.5
3 0.5
MY1B20 0.4 MY1B16
0.4 MY1B20
2 MY1B16 0.3
0.3
0.2 MY1B10
MY1B16 MY1B16
D-
0.2
1 MY1B10
MY1B16 -X
0.1 0.1 MY1B10
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 Individual
-X
Technical
data
953
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 954
MY1B
Series
Model Selection
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1B to your application.
Cylinder ······································· MY1B32-500 Mounting Orientation
Average operating speed υa ···· 300 mm/s 1. Horizontal
z 2. Wall
mounting
y
mounting
Mounting orientation ··················Horizontal mounting P. 948
Cushion ······································· Air cushion x
y z
(δ = 1/100) W: Workpiece (2 kg) x
3. Ceiling x
P. 998 mounting
P. 1042
y z y
x
z
MY1B32-500

2. Load Blocking
Y Mass and Center of Gravity for Workpiece
Center of gravity
X Workpiece Mass
no. m X-axis Y-axis Z-axis
Z 20
W 2 kg 20 mm 30 mm 50 mm
50
30

m1: Mass
m1 max (from (1) of graph MY1B/m1) = 27 (kg)················································ m1
Load factor α1 = m1/m1 max = 2/27 = 0.07
X
M1: Moment
M1 max (from (2) of graph MY1B/M1) = 13 (N·m)············································································ m1
–3
M1 = m1 x g x X = 2 x 9.8 x 20 x 10 = 0.39 (N·m)
Load factor α2 = M1/M1 max = 0.39/13 = 0.03
M1
M2: Moment Y
M2 max (from (3) of graph MY1B/M2) = 1.6 (N·m)·········································································

M3 = m1 x g x Y = 2 x 9.8 x 30 x 10–3 = 0.59 (N·m) m1
Load factor α3 = M2/M2 max = 0.59/1.6 = 0.37 M2
954
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 955


MY1B
FE = 1.4υa x δ x m x g = 1.4 x 300 x
1 FE
x 2 x 9.8 = 82.3 (N)
100
M1E: Moment
M1E MY1M
Z
M1E max (from (1) of graph MY1B/M1 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 9.5 (N·m)················· MY1C
M1
1 1
M1E = x FE x Z = x 82.3 x 50 x 10–3 = 1.37 (N·m)
3 3 MY1H
M3
MY1HT
M3E: Moment Y
M3E max (from (5) of graph MY1B/M3 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 2.9 (N·m)················· FE
MY1W
1 1 M3E
M3E =
3
x FE x Y =
3
x 82.3 x 30 x 10–3 = 0.82 (N·m) MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
5. Sum and Examination of Guide Load Factors MY3M

∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 + α5 = 0.89 ≤ 1
In an actual calculation, when the total sum of guide load factors ∑α in the formula above is more than 1, consider either
decreasing the speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series. This calculation can be easily made using
the “SMC Pneumatics CAD System”.
MY1B/m1 MY1B/M1 MY1B/M2 MY1B/M3

200 200
500 50
400 40 100
300
100 30
200
20 50
40
100 30
50 MY1B100 10 MY1B100 MY1B100
40 20
50
30 (1) 40 MY1B80 5 MY1B80 MY1B80
30 4 10
Load mass kg
MY1B63 3
Moment N·m
Moment N·m
Moment N·m
20 MY1B100 20 (2) MY1B63 MY1B63

MY1B80
(4) 2 (3) 5
10 MY1B50 4
MY1B63 MY1B50 3
(5) MY1B50
10 1
MY1B50 MY1B40
5 2
MY1B40 4 MY1B40 MY1B40
3 0.5
MY1B32 MY1B32 0.4
5 2 1
0.3 MY1B32
4 MY1B32
MY1B25 MY1B25
0.2
3 1 0.5
MY1B20 MY1B25
0.4 MY1B25
MY1B20
0.1 0.3
2 MY1B16 0.5
0.4 MY1B20
0.2 MY1B20
0.3 MY1B16
0.05
0.2 0.04 MY1B16 MY1B16
1 MY1B10 MY1B10 0.1
0.03
0.1 0.02 MY1B10 0.06 MY1B10
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
955
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 956

Basic Type
Series MY1B
ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
How to Order
Basic type MY1B 20 300 M9BW

Basic type Made to Order
Bore size Auto switch Refer to page 957
(mm) Port thread type Piping Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet) for details.
10 10 mm Symbol Type Bore size Nil Standard type For ø10 cylinders without an auto
16 16 mm M thread ø10, ø16, ø20 G Centralized piping type switch, the cylinder configuration is for Number of auto
Nil the reed auto switch. switches
20 20 mm Rc ø25, ø32, ø40, Note) For ø10, only G is Contact SMC when the solid state auto
available. Nil 2 pcs.
25 25 mm TN NPT ø50, ø63, ø80, switch is retrofitted.
32 32 mm TF G ø100 S 1 pc.
Cylinder stroke (mm) Applicable auto switches vary
40 40 mm depending on the bore size. Select n “n” pcs.
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 957.
50 50 mm an applicable one referring to the
63 63 mm Stroke adjusting unit table below.
80 80 mm Nil Without adjusting unit

Suffix for stroke adjusting unit
100 100 mm A With adjusting bolt
Nil Both sides
L With low load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt
S One side
H With high load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt
Note) “S” is applicable for stroke adjusting units A, L and H.
AL With one A unit and one L unit
AH With one A unit and one H unit each
Shock Absorbers for L and H Units
LH With one L unit and one H unit each
Bore size
Only the A unit is available for ø16. Stroke adjusting unit is not (mm) 10 20 25 32 40
available for ø50, ø63, ø80 and ø100. For detailed information Unit no.
on stroke adjusting unit specifications, refer to page 957. L unit — RB0806 RB1007 RB1412
H unit RB0805 RB1007 RB1412 RB2015
The shock absorber service life is different from that of the MY1B cylinder
depending on operating conditions. Refer to the RB Series Specific
Product Precautions for the replacement period.
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)

Electrical Pre-wired
Type Special function entry Wiring (Output) Perpendicular In-line 0.5 1 3 5 connector Applicable load
DC AC
ø10 to ø20 ø25 to ø100 ø10 to ø20 ø25 to ø100 (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
M9NV ∗∗ M9N ∗∗
3-wire (NPN)
[Y69A] [Y59A]
[—]
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9PV ∗∗ M9P ∗∗
Solid state switch
— 3-wire (PNP)
[Y7PV] [Y7P] [—]
M9BV ∗∗ M9B ∗∗
2-wire 12V —
[Y69B] [Y59B] [—] Relay,
Grommet Yes 24V —
M9NWV ∗∗ M9NW ∗∗ PLC
3-wire (NPN)
[Y7NWV] [Y7NW]
[—]

5V, 12V IC circuit
Diagnostic indication M9PWV ∗∗ M9PW ∗∗
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP)
[Y7PWV] [Y7PW]

[—]
M9BWV ∗∗ M9BW ∗∗
2-wire 12V
[Y7BWV] [Y7BW]
—
[—]
Reed switch
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
— 5V — A96V — A96 Z76 — — — IC circuit —
Yes
— Grommet A93V — A93 — — — —
100V — Relay,
2-wire 24V 12V — — — Z73 — — PLC
No 100V or less A90V — A90 Z80 — — — IC circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-M9type cannot be mounted on ø50.
3 m ·········· L (Example) M9NWL Select auto switches in brackets.
5 m ·········· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ There are other applicable auto switches than listed above. For details, refer to page 1053.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled).
956
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 957

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Fluid Air
Action Double acting
Operating pressure range 0.2 to 0.8MPa 0.1 to 0.8 MPa
Proof pressure 1.2 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60°C
Cushion Rubber bumper Air cushion
JIS Symbol
Lubrication Non-lube MY1B
1000 or less +1.8
0
Stroke length tolerance 2700 or less +1.8 +2.8
0 , 2701 to 5000 0
1001 to 3000 +2.8
0 MY1M
Front/Side port M5 x 0.8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Rc 3/8 Rc 1/2
Piping
Port size Bottom port ø4 ø5 ø6 ø8 ø10 ø11 ø16 ø18 MY1C
MY1H
Stroke Adjusting Unit Specifications MY1HT
Bore size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40
Unit symbol A H A A L H A L H A L H A L H
MY1W
RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB
Configuration
With 0805
+
With With 0806
+
With 1007
+
With
1007
+
1412
+
With
1412
+
2015
+
1412
+
2015
+
MY2C
Shock absorber model adjusting with adjusting adjusting with with adjusting with with adjusting with with adjusting with with
bolt adjusting bolt bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting
bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt MY2H
Fine stroke adjustment range (mm) 0 to –5 0 to –5.6 0 to –6 0 to –11.5 0 to –12 0 to –16
MY3A
Stroke adjustment range When exceeding the stroke fine adjustment range: Utilize a made-to-order specifications “-X416” and “-X417”. MY3B
∗ Stroke adjustment range is applicable for one side when mounted on a cylinder.
MY3M
Shock Absorber Specifications Piston Speed

RB RB RB RB RB Bore size (mm) 10 16 to 100
Model
0805 0806 1007 1412 2015 Without stroke adjusting unit 100 to 500 mm/s 100 to 1000 mm/s
Max. energy absorption (J) 1.0 2.9 5.9 19.6 58.8 Stroke A unit 100 to 200 mm/s 100 to 1000 mm/s (1)
Stroke absorption (mm) 5 6 7 12 15 adjusting unit L unit and H unit 100 to 1000 mm/s 100 to 1500 mm/s (2)
Max. collision speed (mm/s) 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 Note 1) Be aware that when the stroke adjusting range is increased by
manipulating the adjusting bolt, the air cushion capacity
Max. operating frequency(cycle/min) 80 80 70 45 25
decreases. Also, when exceeding the air cushion stroke ranges
Spring Extended 1.96 1.96 4.22 6.86 8.34 on page 960, the piston speed should be 100 to 200 mm per
force (N) second.
Retracted 3.83 4.22 6.86 15.98 20.50
Note 2) The piston speed is 100 to 1000 mm/s for centralized piping.
Operating temperature range (°C) 5 to 60 Note 3) Use at a speed within the absorption capacity range. Refer to
The shock absorber service life is different from that of the MY1B cylinder depending page 959.
on operating conditions. Refer to the RB Series Specific Product Precautions for the
replacement period.
Made to Order Specifications Standard Stroke

(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1565.) Bore size Maximum manufacturable stroke
Standard stroke (mm)∗
(mm) (mm)
Symbol Specifications
10, 16 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 3000
—XB11 Long stroke type
20, 25, 32, 40 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600
—XC67 NBR rubber lining in dust seal band 5000
50, 63, 80, 100 1800, 2000
—X168 Helical insert thread specifications
—X416 Holder mounting bracket Ι ∗ Strokes are manufacturable in 1 mm increments, up to the maximum stroke. However, when
—X417 Holder mounting bracket ΙΙ exceeding a 2000 mm stroke, specify “-XB11” at the end of the model number.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
957
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 958
Series MY1B
Theoretical Output
(N)
Bore size Piston area Operating pressure (MPa)
(mm) (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
10 78 15 23 31 39 46 54 62
16 200 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
20 314 62 94 125 157 188 219 251
25 490 98 147 196 245 294 343 392
32 804 161 241 322 402 483 563 643
40 1256 251 377 502 628 754 879 1005
50 1962 392 588 784 981 1177 1373 1569
63 3115 623 934 1246 1557 1869 2180 2492
80 5024 1004 1507 2009 2512 3014 3516 4019
100 7850 1570 2355 3140 3925 4710 5495 6280
Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm2)
Mass
(kg)
Additional Side support Stroke adjusting unit mass

Bore size Basic mass mass (per set) (per unit)
(mm) mass per each 50mm A unit L unit H unit
of stroke Type A and B
mass mass mass
10 0.15 0.04 0.003 0.01 — 0.02
16 0.61 0.06 0.01 0.04 — —
20 1.06 0.10 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.10
25 1.33 0.12 0.02 0.06 0.10 0.18
32 2.65 0.18 0.02 0.12 0.21 0.40
40 3.87 0.27 0.04 0.23 0.32 0.49 Calculation: (Example) MY1B25-300A
• Basic mass ···············1.33 kg
50 7.78 0.44 0.04 — — —
• Cylinder stroke ···········300 stroke
63 13.10 0.70 0.08 — — — • Additional mass ········0.12/50 stroke
80 20.70 1.18 0.17 — — — 1.33 + 0.12 x 300/50 + 0.06 x 2 ≅ 2.17 kg
• Mass of A unit ··········0.06 kg
100 35.70 1.97 0.17 — — —
Option
Stroke Adjusting Unit Part No.
Bore size
(mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40
Unit no.
Left MY-A10A1 MY-A16A1 MY-A20A1 MY-A25A1 MY-A32A1 MY-A40A1
A unit
Right MY-A10A2 MY-A16A2 MY-A20A2 MY-A25A2 MY-A32A2 MY-A40A2
Left — — MY-A20L1 MY-A25L1 MY-A32L1 MY-A40L1
L unit
Right — — MY-A20L2 MY-A25L2 MY-A32L2 MY-A40L2
Left MY-A10H1 — MY-A20H1 MY-A25H1 MY-A32H1 MY-A40H1
H unit
Right MY-A10H2 — MY-A20H2 MY-A25H2 MY-A32H2 MY-A40H2
Stroke adjusting unit form and mounting direction

Left side Right side
H unit
L unit
Port Port
Stroke adjusting unit

Example of LH attachment
Side Support Part No.

Bore size
(mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Type
Side support A MY-S10A MY-S16A MY-S20A MY-S25A MY-S32A MY-S50A MY-S63A
Side support B MY-S10B MY-S16B MY-S20B MY-S25B MY-S32B MY-S50B MY-S63B
For details about dimensions, etc., refer to page 971.
A set of side supports consists of a left support and a right support.
958
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 959

Cushion Capacity
Cushion Selection Absorption Capacity of Rubber Bumper, Air Cushion and Stroke Adjusting Units
<Rubber bumper>
Rubber bumpers are a standard feature on MY1B10 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1B32 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
MY1B10. 2000
Since the stroke absorption of rubber bump- 1500 2000
1500 Hu
ers is short, when adjusting the stroke with
Collision speed mm/s

H

1000 nit
un
an A unit, install an external shock absorb- it 1000
er. Ru
Air
cus
hio
Lu
nit
MY1B
500 bb n
er
The load and speed range which can be 400 bu 500
absorbed by a rubber bumper is inside the 300 m pe
r
400 MY1M
300
rubber bumper limit line of the graph. 200
<Air cushion>
200 MY1C
Air cushions are a standard feature on 100
80 100
mechanically jointed rodless cylinders. 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 MY1H
(Except ø10.) m3 max.
The air cushion mechanism is incorporat- m3 max. m2 max. m1 max. m2 max. m1 max.
Load mass kg Load mass kg
MY1HT
ed to prevent excessive impact of the pis-
ton at the stroke end during high speed
operation. The purpose of air cushion, MY1W
thus, is not to decelerate the piston MY1B16 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1B40 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
near the stroke end. MY2C
2000 2000
The ranges of load and speed that air 1500 1500
MY2H
cushions can absorb are within the air Hu

1000 1000 nit
cushion limit lines shown in the graphs. Air
<Stroke adjusting unit with shock ab-
cus
hio Lu MY3A
n nit MY3B
500 500 Air
sorber> 400 400 cus
h ion
Use this unit when operating with a load or
speed exceeding the air cushion limit line,
300 300
MY3M
200 200
or when cushioning is required outside of
the effective air cushion stroke range due 100 100
to stroke adjustment. 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 2 3 4 5 10 20 50
L unit m3 max. m2 max. m1 max. m2 max. m3 max. m1 max.

Use this unit when cushioning is neces- Load mass kg Load mass kg
sary outside of the effective air cushion
range even if the load and speed are with-
in the air cushion limit line, or when the cyl- MY1B20 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1B50 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
inder is operated in a load and speed
range above the air cushion limit line and 2000 2000
below the L unit limit line. 1500 1500
Air
H unit 1000 1000 cus
hio
Use this unit when the cylinder is operated n
Hu
in a load and speed range above the L unit 500 nit 500
limit line and below the H unit limit line. 400 Lu 400
nit
300 Air 300
cus
hion
Caution 200 200
1. Refer to the figure below when 100

1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50
100
2 3 5 10 20 30 50 100
using the adjusting bolt to per-
form stroke adjustment. m3 max. m2 max. m1 max. m2 max. m3 max. m1 max.
When the effective stroke of the shock Load mass kg Load mass kg
absorber decreases as a result of
stroke adjustment, the absorption ca-
pacity decreases dramatically. Secure MY1B25 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1B63 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
the adjusting bolt at the position where
2000 2000
it protrudes approximately 0.5 mm from Hu
1500 nit 1500
the shock absorber. Air

1000 Lu 1000 cus
Air nit hio
Adjusting bolt cus n
hio
n
500 500
400 400
300
0.5 300
D-
200 200
100 100
-X
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 100
Shock absorber Individual
m2.m3 max. m1 max. m2 max. m3 max. m1 max. -X
2. Do not use a shock absorber togeth- Load mass kg Load mass kg Technical
er with air cushion. data
959
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 960
Series MY1B
Cushion Capacity
Rubber Bumper/Air Cushion Tightening Torque for Stroke

Stroke Adjustment Unit Absorption Capacity Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts (N·m) Precautions
Bore size (mm) Unit Tightening torque
MY1B80 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa A
10 0.4 Be sure to read before handling. Refer
H
2000 to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety
1500
16 A 0.7
Air
A
Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
cus
1000 hio
n 20 L 1.8 Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
H
500
400
300 25
A
L 3.5
Caution
H Use caution not to get your hands
200
A caught in the unit.
32 L 5.8 • When using a product with stroke
100 adjusting unit, the space between the
5 10 20 30 50 100 H
A slide table (slider) and the stroke
m2 max. m3 max. m1 max. adjusting unit becomes narrow at the
40 L 13.8
Load mass kg
stroke end, causing a danger of hands
H
getting caught. Install a protective cover
to prevent direct contact with the human
MY1B100 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting body.
Adjusting bolt Unit holding bolt
2000 Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts (N·m)
lock nut Lock plate
1500 Air Bore size (mm) Unit Tightening torque
cus holding bolt

1000 hio 20 H 1.2
n
L 1.2
25
500 H 3.3
400 L 3.3
300 32
H 10
200 L 3.3
40
H 10
100
5 10 20 30 50 100 Calculation of Absorbed Energy Lock plate Shock absorber
m2 max. m3 max. m1 max.

for Stroke Adjusting Unit <Fastening of unit>
Load mass kg
with Shock Absorber (N·m) The unit can be secured by evenly
Horizontal Vertical Vertical tightening the four unit holding bolts.
collision (Downward) (Upward)
Air Cushion Stroke
Bore size (mm) Cushion stroke
(mm)
Caution
m
s υ m
Do not operate with the stroke
16 12 Type of s
impact υ adjusting unit fixed in an
20 15 s
intermediate position.
25 15
υ m When the stroke adjusting unit is fixed in
32 19 an intermediate position, slippage can
40 24 occur depending on the amount of energy
1 released at the time of an impact. In such
m·υ2
50 30 Kinetic energy
E1 2 cases, the use of the adjusting bolt
63 37 mounting brackets, available per made-to-
80 40 Thrust energy order specifications -X416 and -X417, is
F·s Fs + m·g·s Fs – m·g·s
E2 recommended. (Except ø10)
100 40
Absorbed energy For other lengths, please consult with
E1 + E2
Rubber Bumper (ø10 only) E SMC (Refer to “Tightening Torque for
Positive Stroke from One End Symbol Stroke Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts”.)
Due to Pressure υ: Speed of impact object (m/s) <Stroke adjustment with adjusting bolt>
F: Cylinder thrust (N) Loosen the adjusting bolt lock nut, and
1 s: Shock absorber stroke (m) adjust the stroke from the lock plate side
0.9 m:Mass of impact object (kg) using a hexagon wrench. Retighten the
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) lock nut.
0.8 Note) The speed of the impact object is measured at <Stroke adjustment with shock
Displacement mm
0.7 the time of impact with the shock absorber. absorber>

0.6
Loosen the two lock plate holding bolts,
turn the shock absorber and adjust the
0.5 stroke. Then, uniformly tighten the lock
0.4
plate holding bolts to secure the shock
absorber.
0.3 Take care not to over-tighten the holding
0.2
bolts. (Except ø10 and ø20 L unit.) (Refer
to “Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting
0.1 Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts”.)
0
Note)
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 Although the lock plate may slightly bend
Pressure MPa due to tightening of the lock plate holding
bolt, this does not a affect the shock
absorber and locking function.
960
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 961

Construction: ø10
Centralized piping type: MY1B10G
29 25 18 9 8 16 11 4 22 6 7 17 5 14 19 2
15
MY1B
MY1M
3
MY1C
MY1H
1 30
MY1HT
28 12 21 10
20
24
MY1W
MY2C
13 27
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
26
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 15 Belt clamp Special resin
2 Head cover WR Aluminum alloy Painted 20 Bearing Special resin
3 Head cover WL Aluminum alloy Painted 21 Spacer Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
4 Piston yoke Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 22 Spring pin Stainless steel
5 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 23 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
6 End Cover Special resin 24 Round binding head crew Carbon steel Nickel plated
7 Wear ring Special resin 25 Slotted set screw Carbon steel Black zinc chromated
8 Bumper Polyurethane rubber 26 Hexagon socket head plug Carbon steel Nickel plated
9 Holder Stainless steel 27 Magnet –
10 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated 28 Top plate Stainless steel
11 Belt separator Special resin 29 Head plate Stainless steel
12 Seal magnet Rubber magnet 30 Felt Felt
Replacement Part: Seal Kit

No. Description Qty. MY1B10
13 Seal belt 1 MY10-16A- Stroke
14 Dust seal band 1 MY10-16B- Stroke
16 Scraper 2
17 Piston seal 2
MY1B10-PS
18 Tube gasket 2
19 O-ring 4
∗ Seal kit includes !6, !7, !8 and !9.
Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
When !3 and !4 are shipped independently, a grease
pack is included. (10 g per 1000 strokes)
Order with the following part number when only the D-
grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g)
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
961
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 962
Series MY1B
Construction: ø16 to ø100
MY1B16 to 100
23 33 8 32 31 30 11 4 19 24 6 7 5 1 2
16
6
47
30
37 39
26 MY1B16/20
38
40
MY1B80/100 36
MY1B16
43 45 11
26 17 12 28 20 15 13 18 10
SMC
SMC
27 22
21
MY1B63 36
46
34 44
MY1B50/63/80/100 S
42
9 41 16
17 MY1B80/100
MY1B16
14 25 29 MY1B80/100
35 29
962
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 963

MY1B16 to 100
Component Parts
1 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 26 Magnet —
2 Head cover WR Aluminum alloy Painted 28 Top cover Stainless steel
3 Head cover WL Aluminum alloy Painted 29 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated
4 Piston yoke Aluminum alloy Anodized Painted
36 Head plate Aluminum alloy
5 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated (ø63 to ø100) MY1B
Special resin 37 Backup plate Special resin (ø80, ø100)
6 End cover Nickel plated Guide roller B Special resin (ø80, ø100)
Carbon steel (ø80, ø100)
38
39 Guide roller A Stainless steel (ø80, ø100)
MY1M
7 Wear ring Special resin 40 Guide roller shaft B Stainless steel (ø80, ø100)
8 Cushion ring Brass
41 Side cover Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized MY1C
9 Cushion needle Rolled steel Nickel plated (ø80, ø100)
10 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated 42 Type CR retaining ring Spring steel MY1H
11 Belt separator Special resin Hexagon socket Chromium Nickel plated
43 button head screw molybdenum steel (ø80, ø100)
12 Guide roller Special resin (ø16 to ø63)
13 Guide roller shaft Stainless steel (ø16 to ø63) Hexagon socket Chromium Nickel plated MY1HT
44 button head screw molybdenum steel
Special resin (ø80, ø100)
16 Belt clamp
Aluminum alloy Chromated (ø80, ø100) 45 Spacer B Stainless steel (ø80, ø100) MY1W
17 Bearing Special resin 46 Seal magnet Rubber magnet (ø80, ø100)
18 Spacer Stainless steel (ø16 to ø63) Special resin (ø16, ø20)
19 Spring pin Carbon tool steel Black zinc chromated
47 Lube retainer
MY2C
20 Type E retaining ring Cold rolled special steel strip (ø25 to ø63)
21 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated MY2H
22 Hexagon socket button head screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
Hexagon socket Black zinc chromated/ MY3A
23 head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated MY3B
24 Double round parallel key Carbon steel (ø16 to ø40)
25 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated MY3M

No. Description Qty. MY1B16 MY1B20 MY1B25 MY1B32 MY1B40
14 Seal belt 1 MY16-16A- Stroke MY20-16A- Stroke MY25-16A- Stroke MY32-16A- Stroke MY40-16A- Stroke
15 Dust seal band 1 MY16-16B- Stroke MY20-16B- Stroke MY25-16B- Stroke MY32-16B- Stroke MY40-16B- Stroke
27 Side scraper 2 MYB20-15CA7164B MYB25-15BA5900B MYB32-15BA5901B MYB40-15BA5902B
34 O-ring 2 ø4 x ø1.8 x ø1.1 ø4 x ø1.8 x ø1.1 ø5.1 x ø3 x ø1.05 ø7.15 x ø3.75 x ø1.7 ø7.15 x ø3.75 x ø1.7
30 Scrape 2
31 Piston seal 2
32 Cushion seal 2 MY1B16-PS MY1B20-PS MY1B25-PS MY1B32-PS MY1B40-PS
33 Tube gasket 2
35 O-ring 4
No. Description Qty. MY1B50 MY1B63 MY1B80 MY1B100

14 Seal belt 1 MY50-16A- Stroke MY63-16A- Stroke MY80-16A- Stroke MY100-16A- Stroke
15 Dust seal band 1 MY50-16B- Stroke MY63-16B- Stroke MY80-16B- Stroke MY100-16B- Stroke
27 Side scraper 2 MYB50-15CA7165B MYB63-15CA7166B MYB80-15CK2470B MY100-15CK2471B
34 O-ring 2 ø8.3 x ø4.5 x ø1.9 C4 C6 C6
30 Scrape 2
31 Piston seal 2
32 Cushion seal 2 MY1B50-PS MY1B63-PS MY1B80-PS MY1B100-PS
33 Tube gasket 2
35 O-ring 4
∗ Seal kit includes #0, #1, #2, #3 and #5. Order the seal kit based on each bore size.
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
When !4 and !5 are shipped independently, a grease pack is included. (10 g per 1000 strokes)
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Note) Two kinds of dust seal bands are available. Verify the type to use, since the part number varies
depending on the treatmentof the hexagon socket head set screw @3.
A: Black zinc chromated MY-16B-stroke, B: Nickel plated MY-16BW-stroke
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
963
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 964
Series MY1B
Centralized Piping Type ø10 Refer to page 1056 regarding centralized piping port variations.
MY1B10G Stroke
10 10
7.3
7.8
2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug)
4 x M3 x 0.5 depth 5 2 x 2 x ø3.4 through-hole

30 50
Bottom side M4 x 0.7 depth 7
5.9 25 5.9
26
22
28
17
5 100 + Stroke
Floating bracket mounting thread

(2 x M3 x 0.5 thread depth 5)
25 24
3.5
2 x ø5 counterbore depth 2
2 x M5 x 0.8 1
1
3
(Port)
2.2
1.7
SMC SMC
27
20.2
19.5
10
10
10 10
6.8
7.3
15 15
12 8.5 55 8.5 12
2 x M5 x 0.8 110 + Stroke

2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) (Hexagon socket head plug)
964
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 965

Standard Type/Centralized Piping Type ø16, ø20 Refer to page 1056 regarding centralized piping port variations.
MY1B16쏔/20쏔 Stroke
(LL) L
PA 4 x MM depth M 2 x 2 x øB counterbore depth C
øLD through-hole
YW
MY1B
QW
NW
PB
MY1M
PG Q + Stroke
MY1C
Floating bracket mounting thread MY1H
PC (2 x JJ thread depth from bottom of counterbore KK)
1 LW
M5 x 0.8 2 x øT counterbore depth E M5 x 0.8
MY1HT
PD
(Hexagon socket head plug) (Port)
YH
MY1W
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
NH
NE
NC
MY2C
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT GA M5 x 0.8 Cushion needle GA TT UU MY2H
2 x M5 x 0.8 G (Port) G 2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) GB (Hexagon socket head plug) MY3A
M5 x 0.8
MY3B
A (Hexagon socket head plug) N
Z + Stroke MY3M
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
XX
XX
MY1B쏔G VV 2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x M5 x 0.8 VV MY1B쏔G

(mm)
Model A B C E G GA GB H J JJ K KK L LD LL LW M MM N NC NE
MY1B16쏔 80 6 3.5 2 14 9 16 37 M5 x 0.8 M4 x 0.7 10 6.5 80 3.5 40 30 6 M4 x 0.7 20 14 27.8
MY1B20쏔 100 7.5 4.5 2 12.5 12.5 17.5 46 M6 x 1 M4 x 0.7 12 10 100 4.5 50 37 8 M5 x 0.8 25 17.5 34
(mm)
Model NH NW PA PB PC PD PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS T TT UU VV WW XX YH YW Z
MY1B16쏔 27 37 40 20 40 4.5 3.5 7.5 153 9 30 11 3 7 9 10.5 10 7.5 22 26 32 160
MY1B20쏔 33.5 45 50 25 50 5 4.5 11.5 191 11 36 14.5 5 8 10.5 12 12.5 10.5 24 32.5 40 200
2 x ød Y
R
S
XX
øD
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring) D-
Hole Size for Centralized Piping on the Bottom -X
Model WX Y S d D R Applicable O-ring
MY1B16쏔 22 6.5 4 4 8.4 1.1 Individual
C6 -X
MY1B20쏔 24 8 6 4 8.4 1.1
(Machine the mounting side to the dimensions below.) Technical
data
965
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 966
Series MY1B
Standard Type/Centralized Piping Type ø25, ø32, ø40 Refer to page 1056 regarding centralized piping port variations.
MY1B25쏔/32쏔/40쏔 Stroke
(LL) L 4 x MM depth M
PA 2 x 2 x øB counterbore depth C
øLD through-hole
YW
QW
NW
PB
PG Q + Stroke
PC (2 x JJ thread depth from bottom of counterbore KK)
P 2 x øT counterbore depth E P LW
PD
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) (Port) 1
YH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NE
NH
NC
RR
PP
RR
PP
UU TT G P Cushion needle G TT UU
2xP (Port) P GB 2xP
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) A (Hexagon socket head taper plug) N (Hexagon socket head taper plug)
Z + Stroke
P P
(Hexagon socket head (Port)
taper plug) 2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
XX
XX
P
(Hexagon socket head P
taper plug) (Port)
VV 2 x ZZ 2 x ZZ VV
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) (Hexagon socket head taper plug)
MY1B쏔G MY1B쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C E G GB H J JJ K KK L LD LL LW M MM N NC NE NH NW
MY1B25쏔 110 9 5.5 2 16 24.5 54 M6 x 1 M5 x 0.8 9.5 9 110 5.6 55 42 9 M5 x 0.8 30 20 40.5 39 53
MY1B32쏔 140 11 6.6 2 19 30 68 M8 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 16 10 140 6.8 70 52 12 M6 x 1 37 25 50 49 64
MY1B40쏔 170 14 8.5 2 23 36.5 84 M10 x 1.5 M6 x 1 15 13 170 8.6 85 64 12 M6 x 1 45 30.5 63 61.5 75
(mm)
Model P PA PB PC PD PP PG Q QQ QW RR SS T TT UU VV WW XX YH YW Z ZZ
MY1B25쏔 Rc 1/8 60 30 55 6 12 7 206 16 42 16 6 10 14.5 15 16 12.5 28 38.5 46 220 Rc 1/16
MY1B32쏔 Rc 1/8 80 35 70 10 17 8 264 16 51 23 4 10 16 16 19 16 32 48 55 280 Rc 1/16
MY1B40쏔 Rc 1/4 100 40 85 12 18.5 9 322 24 59 27 10.5 14 20 22 23 19.5 36 60.5 67 340 Rc 1/8
“P” indicates cylinder supply ports.
2 x ød Y
S
R
WX
øD
Bottom ported (ZZ)

(Applicable O-ring)
Hole Size for Centralized Piping on the Bottom

MY1B25쏔 28 9 7 6 11.4 1.1
C9
MY1B32쏔 32 11 9.5 6 11.4 1.1
MY1B40쏔 36 14 11.5 8 13.4 1.1 C11.2
(Machine the mounting side to the dimensions below.)
966
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 967

MY1B50쏔/63쏔 Stroke
(LL) L 4 x MM depth M
PA 2 x 2 x øB counterbore depth C
øLD through-hole
YW
MY1B
QW
NW
PB
MY1M
PG Q + Stroke
MY1C
PC (2 x JJ thread depth from bottom of counterbore KK) MY1H
Rc 3/8 2 x øT counterbore depth E Rc 3/8 1 LW
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) PD (Port) MY1HT
YH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
MY1W
NH
NE
NC
MY2C
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT G Rc 3/8 Cushion needle G TT UU
2 x Rc 3/8 (Port) Rc 3/8 GB 2 x Rc 3/8 MY2H
MY3A
Z + Stroke MY3B
Rc 3/8
Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket head
taper plug)
(Port) MY3M
(WW)
(WW)
2 x 2 x J depth K
XX
XX
Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket head Rc 3/8
taper plug) (Port)
VV 2 x Rc 1/4 2 x Rc 1/4 VV
MY1B쏔G MY1B쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C E G GB H J JJ K KK L LD LL LW M MM N NC NE
MY1B50쏔 200 14 8.5 3 23.5 37 94 M12 x 1.75 M6 x 1 25 17 200 9 100 80 14 M8 x 1.25 47 38 76.5
MY1B63쏔 230 17 10.5 3 25 39 116 M14 x 2 M8 x 1.25 28 24 230 11 115 96 16 M8 x 1.25 50 51 100
(mm)
Model NH NW PA PB PC PD PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS T TT UU VV WW XX YH YW Z
MY1B50쏔 75 92 120 50 100 8.5 8 24 384 27 76 34 10 15 22.5 23.5 23.5 22.5 47 74 92 400
MY1B63쏔 95 112 140 60 115 9.5 10 37.5 440 29.5 92 45.5 13.5 16 27 29 25 28 56 94 112 460
2 x ød Y
R
S
WX
øD
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring) D-
Applicable O-ring
-X
Model WX Y S d D R
MY1B50쏔 47 15.5 14.5 10 17.5 1.1 Individual
C15 -X
MY1B63쏔 56 15 18 10 17.5 1.1
(Machine the mounting side to the dimensions below.) Technical
data
967
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 968
Series MY1B
MY1B80/100 Stroke
(LL) L
PE
PA 8 x MM depth M 2 x 2 x øLD through-hole
PF
YW
NW
QW
PB
80 ± 0.05
(2 x ø10H7 depth 10)
PG Q + Stroke
Rc 1/2 1
Rc 1/2 (Port) NN LW
(Hexagon socket head taper plug)
YH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NH
RR
NC
RR
PP
YY
PP
UU TT G Rc 1/2 Cushion needle G TT UU
2 x Rc 1/2 (Port) Rc 1/2 GB 2 x Rc 1/2
Z + Stroke
Rc 1/2
(Port)
taper plug)
(WW)
(WW)
XX
XX
Rc 1/2
taper plug) (Port)
VV 2 x Rc 1/2 2 x Rc 1/2 VV
MY1BG MY1BG
(mm)
Model A G GB H L LD LL LW M MM N NC NH NN NW PA PB PE
MY1B 80 345 60 71.5 150 340 14 175 112 20 M10 x 1.5 85 71 124 35 140 80 65 240
MY1B100 400 70 79.5 190 400 18 200 140 25 M12 x 1.75 95 85 157 45 176 120 85 280
(mm)
Model PF PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV WW XX YH YW YY Z
MY1B 80 22 15 53 660 35 90 61 15 30 40 60 25 90 122 140 28 690
MY1B100 42 20 69 760 38 120 75 20 40 48 70 28 120 155 176 35 800
2 x ød Y
R
WX
øD
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring)

Model WX Y d D R Applicable O-ring
MY1B 80 90 45 18 26 1.8
P22
MY1B100 120 50 18 26 1.8
968
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 969

Stroke Adjusting Unit

With adjusting bolt
MY1B Bore size 쏔 Stroke A
E
EA
MY1B
EB
W
h h MY1M
Stroke adjusting unit h
TT TT
TT
FC MY1C
15.4
2.8
MY1H
EC
EY
MY1HT
MY1B10 MY1B16 MY1W

(mm)
Applicable bore size E EA EB EC EY FC h TT W
MY2C
MY1B10 10 5 28 3.3 26.3 1.8 5 (Max. 10) 35
MY1B16 14.6 7 34.4 4.2 36.5 2.4 5.4 (Max. 11) 43
MY2H
MY1B20 19 9 43 5.8 45.6 13 3.2 6 (Max. 12) 53 MY3A
MY1B25 20 10 49 6.5 53.5 13 3.5 5 (Max. 16.5) 60 MY3B
MY1B32 25 12 61 8.5 67 17 4.5 8 (Max. 20) 74
MY1B40 31 15 76 9.5 81.5 17 4.5 9 (Max. 25) 94
MY3M
With low load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt

MY1B Bore size 쏔 Stroke L
TT
h
E F
EA
EB
W
(Shock absorber stroke) T S FW

FB
Shock absorber FC
EC
EY
FH
(mm)
Applicable bore size E EA EB EC EY F FB FC FH FW h S T TT W Shock absorber model
MY1B20 19 9 43 5.8 45.6 4 13 3.2 40.8 6 6 (Max. 12) 53 RB0806
MY1B25 20 10 49 6.5 53.5 6 33 13 12 46 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 16.5) 60 RB1007
MY1B32 25 12 61 8.5 67 6 43 17 16 56 4.5 67.3 12 8 (Max. 20) 74 RB1412
D-
MY1B40 31 15 76 9.5 81.5 6 43 17 16 56 4.5 67.3 12 9 (Max. 25) 94 RB1412
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
969
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 970
Series MY1B

With high load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt
MY1B Bore size 쏔 Stroke H
TT
h
E F
EA TT
h
EB
W
(Shock absorber stroke) T S

FW
FB
Shock absorber
FC
a
Workpiece 15.4
2.8
EY
EC
FH
MY1B10
∗ Since the dimension EY of H unit is greater than the table top height (dimension H), when a workpiece is loaded that is larger than the full length (dimension L) of the slide table
allow a clearance of size “a” or larger at the workpiece side.
(mm)
Applicable bore size E EA EB EC EY F FB FC FH FW h S T TT W Shock absorber model a
MY1B10 10 5 28 5.5 29.8 8 1.8 40.8 5 5 (Max. 10) 35 RB0805 3.5
MY1B20 20 10 49 6.5 47.5 6 33 13 12 46 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 11) 60 RB1007 2.5
MY1B25 20 10 57 8.5 57.5 6 43 17 16 56 4.5 67.3 12 5 (Max. 16.5) 70 RB1412 4.5
MY1B32 25 12 74 11.5 73 8 57 22 22 74 5.5 73.2 15 8 (Max. 20) 90 RB2015 6
MY1B40 31 15 82 12 87 8 57 22 22 74 5.5 73.2 15 9 (Max. 25) 100 RB2015 4
970
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 971

Side Support
Side support A
MY-S쏔A
2 x øG
F
2 x øH
E
C A MY1B
D B
MY1M
Side support B
MY-S쏔B MY1C
2xJ
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
E
C A
D B MY2C
(mm)
Model Applicable bore size A B C D E F G H J MY2H
MY-S10 AB MY1B 10 35 43.6 12 21 3.6 1.8 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7
MY3A
MY-S16 AB MY1B 16 43 53.6 15 26 4.9 3 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7 MY3B
MY-S20 AB MY1B 20 53 65.6 25 38 6.4 4 8 4.5 M5 x 0.8
MY-S25 B A MY1B 25 61 75
35 50 8 5 9.5 5.5 M6 x 1 MY3M
MY1B 32 70 84
MY1B 40 87 105
MY-S32 AB 45 64 11.7 6 11 6.6 M8 x 1.25
MY1B 50 113 131
MY-S50 AB MY1B 63 136 158 55 80 14.8 8.5 14 9 M10 x 1.5
MY1B 80 170 200
MY-S63 AB 70 100 18.3 10.5 17.5 11.5 M12 x 1.75
MY1B100 206 236
∗ A set of side supports consists of a left support and a right support.
Guide for Side Support Application
m
For long stroke operation, the cylinder tube
kg 200
may be deflected depending on its own weight
and the load weight. In such a case, use a side 190
support in the middle section. The spacing (l) 180
of the support must be no more than the l
170
values shown in the graph on the right.
160
(4000)
150
140
m 130
l (3200)
120
Caution
Mass m
m 110
MY1B
1. If the cylinder mounting surfaces are 100

100
not measured accurately, using a side 90

(2700)
MY1
support may cause poor operation. l 80

l
Therefore, be sure to level the cylinder (2100)
B80
70
tube when mounting. Also, for long
MY1
60
stroke operation involving vibration
MY
(1800)
B63
and impact, use of a side support is 50

1B5
(1500)
recommended even if the spacing
MY
40
0
value is within the allowable limits (1200)

1B
M
30
Y1 25
40
MY
M B20
(1100)
shown in the graph.
D-
B3
Y1
20 M
1
(900) Y1
B
2. Support brackets are not for mounting; 10 (400) M

B1
6
Y1B
use them solely for providing support. 10
0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
-X
Support spacing l mm Individual
-X
Technical
data
971
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 972
Series MY1B
Floating Bracket
Facilitates connection to other guide systems.
Applicable bore size Applicable bore size

ø10 ø16, ø20
MY-J10 MY-J16/MY-J20
Application Example Application Example
Workpiece
W W
Guide Series MY1B Floating bracket
Mounting Example Mounting Example

G
30 Za
Za D
20
1
E3
C
1
20.5
F
B
E3
41
53
Section Za detail
(Adjustable range)
Q
P
12
Section Za detail (3/1)

6
Adjustable range JJ Zb
K
E4
M4 x 0.7 Zb
H
1
L
8.5
5
2 x 2 x øLD
E4
1
28.5
Section Zb detail
3.5
Section Zb detail (3/1) (Adjustable range)

Adjustable range
(mm)
2 x 2 x ø6.5
Model Applicable bore size A B C D F G H
MY-J16 MY1B16쏔 45 45 22.5 30 52 38 18
Note) A set of brackets with floating mechanism consists of a left bracket MY-J20 MY1B20쏔 55 52 26 35 59 50 21
and a right bracket.
Model Applicable bore size JJ K L P Q E3 E4 LD
MY-J16 MY1B16쏔 M4 x 0.7 10 4 7 3.5 1 1 6
MY-J20 MY1B20쏔 M4 x 0.7 10 4 7 3.5 1 1 6
Note) A set of brackets with floating mechanism consists of a left bracket and a right
bracket.
Installation of Holding Bolts

MY-J10 to 63 (1 set) Component Parts
Slider Pin Conical spring washer Holding bolt Description Qty.
(Piston yoke) Bracket 2
Pin 2
Conical spring washer 2
Holding bolt 2
Included parts
Tightening Torque for Holding Bolts (N·m)
Model Tightening torque Model Tightening torque Model Tightening torque
MY-J10 0.6 MY-J25 3 MY-J50 5
MY-J16 1.5 MY-J32 5 MY-J63 13
MY-J20 1.5 MY-J40 5
972
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 973

Applicable bore size Applicable bore size

ø25, ø32, ø40 ø50, ø63
MY-J25/MY-J32/MY-J40 MY-J50/MY-J63
Application Example Application Example
Workpiece Workpiece MY1B
W W
MY1M
MY1C
MY1H
MY1HT
Guide Series MY1B Floating Bracket Guide Series MY1B Floating Bracket MY1W
Mounting Example Mounting Example MY2C

One set of brackets can be mounted in two directions for
compact combinations. G MY2H
Za
D
MY3A
MY3B
4 x øMM
E3
E1 E1
MY3M
C
E2
F
B
E3
E2
G
D
Section Z detail Section Za detail

(Adjustable range) (Adjustable range)
Q
P
JJ Zb
F
B3
K
E4
B2
H
Z B1
F
C1
A
B 2 x 2 x øLD
E4
H
Section Zb detail
H
(Adjustable range)
A
A
holding bolt
(mm)
Model Applicable bore size A B C D F G H
J MY-J50 MY1B50 110 110 55 70 126 90 37
C MY-J63 MY1B63 131 130 65 80 149 100 37
C2
Mounting direction (1) Mounting direction (2) Model Applicable bore size JJ K L P Q E3 E4 LD
MY-J50 MY1B50 M8 x 1.25 20 7.5 16 8 2.5 2.5 11
Applicable Common Mounting direction (1) MY-J63 MY1B63 M10 x 1.5 20 9.5 19 9.5 2.5 2.5 14
Model
bore size D G H J MM A B C F Note) A set of brackets with floating mechanism consists of a left bracket and a right
MY-J25 MY1B25 40 60 3.2 35 5.5 63 78 39 100 bracket.
MY-J32 MY1B32 55 80 4.5 40 6.5 76 94 47 124
MY-J40 MY1B40 74 100 4.5 47 6.5 92 112 56 144
Applicable Mounting direction (2) Adjustable range

Model
bore size A B1 B2 B3 C1 C2 F E1 E2
MY-J25 MY1B25 65 28 53 78 14 39 96 1 1
MY-J32 MY1B32 82 40 64 88 20 44 111 1 1
MY-J40 MY1B40 98 44 76 108 22 54 131 1 1
Note) A set of brackets with floating mechanism consists of a left bracket and a right
bracket.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
973
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 974
Series MY1B
Floating Bracket
Facilitates connection to other guide systems.
Applicable bore size

ø80, ø100 Floating Bracket Operating Precautions
MY-J80/MY-J100 Caution
Application Example When connecting to a load which has an external guide mechanism,
use a discrepancy absorption mechanism.
Mount the external guide mounting brackets and floating brackets in a
Mounting bracket place where the required degree of freedom for the floating Y and Z axes
Workpiece can be secured.
W The thrust transmission area of the floating bracket must be fixed so that it
does not partially contact with the body.
∗ Confirm the Coordinates and Moments in Model Selection on page 947
for the details of floating Y and Z axes.
Bracket
Guide
Slider
(Piston yoke)
Mounting Example
Support bracket mounting area is heat treated at HRC40 or above.
Floating with round bar
Bracket
+0.3
ø40 +0.1
112
Floating with flat bar
20 +0.3
+0.1
150
Floating Bracket
Positioning hole
(ø10 x 18l ) Bracket mounting hole (ø80)
Hexagon socket head cap screw (M10 x 1.5 x 40l)
Bracket mounting hole (ø100)
Hexagon socket head cap screw (M12 x 1.75 x 40l)
Mounting bracket
31
18
C
B
A
Hexagon Socket
Head Cap Screw
TighteningTorque (N·m)
MY-J80, 100 (1 set) Component Parts
Model Applicable bore size A B (max.) C (min.) Model Tightening torque
Description Qty.
MY-J 80 MY1B 80 181 15 9 MY-J 80 25
Bracket 1
MY-J100 MY1B100 221 15 9 MY-J100 44
Parallel pin 2
Note) • Flat bar or round bar mounting are possible for the support bracket
(slanted lines) mounted by the customer. Holding bolt 4
• “B” and “C” indicate the allowable mounting dimensions for the support
bracket (flat bar or round bar).
• Consider support brackets with dimensions that allow the floating
mechanism to function properly.
974
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 975
Series MY1
Slide Bearing Guide Type
M MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Simple guide type allows a
workpiece to be mounted directly.
Bearing
Adjusting mechanism
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
975
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 976
Series MY1M Prior to Use


Bore size Maximum allowable moment (N·m) Maximum load mass (kg)
Model Select the moment from within the
(mm) M1 M2 M3 m1 m2 m3 range of operating limits shown in the
16 6.0 3.0 1.0 18 7 2.1 graphs. Note that the maximum
20 10 5.2 1.7 26 10.4 3 allowable load value may sometimes
25 15 9.0 2.4 38 15 4.5 be exceeded even within the
MY1M 32 30 15 5.0 57 23 6.6 operating limits shown in the graphs.
40 59 24 8.0 84 33 10
Therefore, also check the allowable
load for the selected conditions.
50 115 38 15 120 48 14
63 140 60 19 180 72 21
Load mass (kg)

m1
m2
m3
Moment (N·m)
L2
L1
L3
<Calculation of guide load factor>

1. Maximum allowable load (1), static moment (2), and dynamic moment (3) (at the time of
impact with stopper) must be examined for the selection calculations.
∗ To evaluate, use υa (average speed) for (1) and (2), and υ (collision speed υ = 1.4υa)
Maximum Load Mass
for (3). Calculate mmax for (1) from the maximum allowable load graph (m1, m2, m3) and
Mmax for (2) and (3) from the maximum allowable moment graph (M1, M2, M3). Select the load from within the range
of limits shown in the graphs. Note
Σα = Maximum allowable load [mmax] + Allowable static moment [Mmax] +
Sum of guide Load mass [m] Static moment [M] (1) Dynamic moment [ME] (2) that the maximum allowable moment
load factors Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax]
≤1 value may sometimes be exceeded
even within the operating limits shown
in the graphs. Therefore, also check
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the workpiece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum the allowable moment for the selected
of the load factors (∑α) is the total of all such moments. conditions.

consideration.
m: Load mass (kg) υ: Collision speed (mm/s)
F: Load (N) L1: Distance to the load's center of gravity (m)
FE: Load equivalent to impact (at impact with stopper) (N) ME: Dynamic moment (N·m)
υa: Average speed (mm/s) δ: Damper coefficient At collision: υ = 1.4υa
M: Static moment (N·m) With rubber bumper = 4/100 υ
(MY1B10, MY1H10)
υ = 1.4υa (mm/s) FE = 1.4υa·δ·m·g
Note 4)
m FE
With air cushion = 1/100
L1
Note 5)
∴ME = 3 ·FE·L1 = 4.57υaδmL1 (N·m)

1 With shock absorber = 1/100 ME
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2)
Note 5) Average load coefficient (= 13 ): This coefficient is for averaging the maximum load moment at the time
of stopper impact according to service life calculations.
3. For detailed selection procedures, refer to pages 978 and 979.
976
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 977

Slide Bearing Guide Type Series MY1M
MY1M/M1 MY1M/M2 MY1M/M3

200
50 20
40
100
30
10 MY1B
20
50 MY1M
40 5
4
30 10 MY1C
MY1M63 3
20 MY1M63
MY1M63
2 MY1M50 MY1H
Moment N·m
Moment N·m
Moment N·m
MY1M50 5 MY1M50
10
4
MY1M40
MY1HT
MY1M40 3 MY1M40 1
2 MY1M32 MY1M32 MY1W

5
0.5
MY1M32
4
MY1M25
0.4 MY2C
3 MY1M25
1 0.3
2 MY1M25 0.2
MY1M20 MY2H
MY1M20
MY3A
MY1M20 0.5 MY1M16 MY3B
1 0.4 MY1M16 0.1
MY1M16 0.3 MY3M
0.5 0.2 0.05
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
MY1M/m1 MY1M/m2 MY1M/m3

30
100
200
20
50
100
40
10
30
50
20
40 5
30 4
MY1M63 3
kg
kg
kg
10 MY1M63 MY1M63
20
Load mass
Load mass
Load mass
MY1M63
MY1M50 2
MY1M50 MY1M50
MY1M40 5
10 MY1M40 MY1M40
4
MY1M32 1
3 MY1M32 MY1M32
5 MY1M25
2 MY1M25 MY1M25
4
MY1M20 0.5
3 MY1M20 0.4 MY1M20
MY1M16 1
2 MY1M16 0.3
MY1M16
0.2
D-
0.5
1
0.4 -X
0.3 0.1
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 Individual
-X
Technical
data
977
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 978
Series MY1M
Model Selection
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1M to your application.
Cylinder ································ MY1M40-500
z
Average operating speed υa ···200 mm/s y
1. Horizontal 2. Wall
mounting mounting
Mounting orientation ··········· Horizontal mounting P. 948
Wd: Workpiece (500 g) x
Cushion ································ Air cushion y z
(δ = 1/100) Wc: MHL2-16D1 (795 g)
x
Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (880 g)
3. Ceiling x
MY1M40-500 P. 998 mounting
P. 1042
y z y
x
z
Wb: MGGLB25-200 (4.35 kg)
2. Load Blocking
Mass and Center of Gravity for Each Workpiece
Center of gravity
Y Workpiece no. Mass
Xn Yn Zn
X
Wa 0.88 kg 65 mm 0 mm 5 mm
210 Z 65
Wb 4.35 kg 150 mm 0 mm 42.5 mm
111 150
Wc 0.795 kg 150 mm 111 mm 42.5 mm
Wd 0.5 kg 150 mm 210 mm 42.5 mm
Y
42.5
5
n=a, b, c, d
3. Composite center of Gravity Calculation

m1 = Σmn
= 0.88 + 4.35 + 0.795 + 0.5 = 6.525 kg
1
X = –––– x Σ (mn x xn)
m1
1
= –––––– (0.88 x 65 + 4.35 x 150 + 0.795 x 150 + 0.5 x 150) = 138.5 mm
6.525
1
Y = –––– x Σ (mn x yn)
m1
1
= –––––– (0.88 x 0 + 4.35 x 0 + 0.795 x 111 + 0.5 x 210) = 29.6 mm
6.525
1
Z = –––– x Σ (mn x zn)
m1
1
= –––––– (0.88 x 5 + 4.35 x 42.5 + 0.795 x 42.5 + 0.5 x 42.5) = 37.4 mm
6.525
4. Calculation of load factor for static load

m1: Mass
m1 max (from (1) of graph MY1M/m1) = 84 (kg)····················································m1
Load factor α1 = m1/m1 max = 6.525/84 = 0.08
X
M1: Moment
M1 max (from (2) of graph MY1M/M1) = 59 (N·m)················································································m1
M1 = m1 x g x X = 6.525 x 9.8 x 138.5 x 10-3 = 8.86 (N·m)
Load factor α 2 = M1/M1 max = 8.86/59 = 0.15 M1
978
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 979

M2 : Moment Y
M2 max (from (3) of graph MY1M/M2) = 24 (N·m)··········································································

m1
M3 = m1 x g x Y = 6.525 x 9.8 x 29.6 x 10-3 = 1.89 (N·m) MY1B
Load factor α3 = M2/M2 max = 1.89/24 = 0.08 M2 MY1M
MY1C
MY1H
1
FE = 1.4υa x δ x m x g = 1.4 x 200 x —— x 6.525 x 9.8 = 179.1 (N)
FE MY1HT
100 M1E
M1E : Moment
Z
MY1W
M1E max (from (4) of graph MY1M/M1 where 1.4υa = 280 mm/s) = 42.1 (N·m)······················· MY2C
M1
1 1
M1E = –– x FE x Z = –– x 179.1 x 37.4 x 10-3 = 2.23 (N·m)
3 3 MY2H
Load factor α4 = M1E/M1E max = 2.23/42.1 = 0.05 M3
MY3A
M3E: Moment Y MY3B
M3E max (from (5) of graph MY1M/M3 where 1.4υa = 280 mm/s) = 5.7 (N·m)······························· FE
MY3M
1 1 M3E
M3E = –– x FE x Y = –– x 179.1 x 29.6 x 10-3 = 1.77 (N·m)
3 3

∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 + α5 = 0.67 ≤ 1
In an actual calculation, when the total sum of guide load factors ∑α in the formula above is more than 1, consider
either decreasing the speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series. This calculation can be easily
made using the “SMC Pneumatics CAD System”.
MY1M/m1 MY1M/M1 MY1M/M2 MY1M/M3

200
200 50 20
40
100
(1) 30 (3)
100 (2) 10
(4) 20 (5)
50
50 40 5
40 30 4
10
30 MY1M63 3
kg
20 MY1M63
Moment N·m
Moment N·m
Moment N·m
MY1M63 MY1M63
2 MY1M50
20 MY1M50 MY1M50
5
Load mass
MY1M50 4
10
MY1M40 1 MY1M40
MY1M40 MY1M40 3
10
MY1M32 2 MY1M32 MY1M32
5
MY1M32 0.5
4
5 MY1M25 0.4
4 3 MY1M25
0.3 MY1M25
3
MY1M20
2 MY1M25
1
0.2
MY1M20 D-
MY1M16 MY1M20
2
MY1M20
1
0.5
0.4 MY1M16 0.1
MY1M16
-X
MY1M16 0.3
1
Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
0.5
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
0.2
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
0.05
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
-X
Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Technical
data
979
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 980

Slide Bearing Guide Type
Series MY1M
ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
How to Order
Slide bearing guide type MY1M 20 G 300 L S M9BW

Slide bearing guide type
Bore size Number of auto switches
(mm) Nil 2 pcs.
Port thread type Piping Made to Order
S 1 pc.
16 16 mm Symbol Type Bore size Refer to page 981
Nil Standard type n “n” pcs.
20 20 mm M thread ø16, ø20 for details.
Nil G Centralized piping type
25 25 mm Rc ø25, ø32,
32 32 mm TN NPT ø40, ø50,
Suffix for stroke Auto switch
40 40 mm TF
Stroke (mm) adjusting unit
G ø63 Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)
Refer to “Standard Stroke”
50 50 mm Nil Both ends
on page 981. Applicable auto switches vary
63 63 mm S One end
depending on the bore size. Select
Stroke adjusting unit Note) “S” is applicable for an applicable one referring to the
Nil Without adjusting unit stroke adjusting units table below.
A, L and H.
A With adjusting bolt
L With low load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt Shock Absorbers for L and H Units
H With high load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
AL With one A unit and one L unit Unit no.
AH With one A unit and one H unit each L unit RB0806 RB1007 RB1412 RB2015
LH With one L unit and one H unit each H unit — RB1007 RB1412 RB2015 RB2725
Note) MY1M16 is not available with H unit.
Indicator light

DC AC
ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø63 ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø63 (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
M9NV ∗∗ M9N ∗∗
3-wire (NPN)
[Y69A] [Y59A]
[—]
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9PV ∗∗ M9P ∗∗
Solid state switch
— 3-wire (PNP)
[Y7PV] [Y7P] [—]
M9BV ∗∗ M9B ∗∗
2-wire 12V —
[Y69B] [Y59B] [—] Relay,
Grommet Yes 24V —
3-wire (NPN)
[Y7NWV] [Y7NW]
[—]

5V, 12V IC circuit
[Y7PWV] [Y7PW]

[—]
2-wire 12V
[Y7BWV] [Y7BW]
—
[—]
Reed switch
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
— 5V — A96V — A96 Z76 — — — IC circuit —
Yes
— Grommet A93V — A93 — — — —
100V — Relay,
2-wire 24V 12V — — — Z73 — — PLC
1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-M9type cannot be mounted on ø25 to ø40.
980
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 981

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Fluid Air
Operating pressure range 0.15 to 0.8 MPa
Cushion Air cushion
1000 or less +1.8
0 +1.8 +2.8
Stroke length tolerance 2700 or less 0 , 2701 to 5000 0
1001 to 3000 +2.8
0 MY1M
Front/Side port M5 x 0.8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Rc 3/8
JIS Symbol Piping
portsize Bottom port ø4 ø5 ø6 ø8 ø10 ø11 MY1C
MY1H
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Unit symbol A L A L H A L H A L H A L H A L H A L H MY1W
RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB
Configuration
With 0806 With 0806 1007 With 1007 1412 With 1412 2015 With 1412 2015 With 2015 2725 With 2015 2725
adjusting + adjusting + + adjusting + + adjusting + + adjusting + + adjusting + + adjusting + + MY2C
Shock absorber model with with with with with with with with with with with with with
bolt adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting
bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt MY2H
Fine stroke adjustment range (mm) 0 to –5 0 to –6 0 to –11.5 0 to –12 0 to –16 0 to –20 0 to –25
MY3A
MY3M

RB RB RB RB RB Bore size (mm) 16 to 63
Model
0806 1007 1412 2015 2725 Without stroke adjusting unit 100 to 1000 mm/s
Max. energy absorption (J) 2.9 5.9 19.6 58.8 147 Stroke A unit 100 to 1000 mm/s (1)
Stroke absorption (mm) 6 7 12 15 25 adjusting unit L unit and H unit 100 to 1500 mm/s (2)
Max. collision speed (mm/s) 1500 Note 1) Be aware that when the stroke adjusting range is increased by
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min) 80 70 45 25 10 manipulating the adjusting bolt, the air cushion capacity
decreases. Also, when exceeding the air cushion stroke ranges on
Spring Extended 1.96 4.22 6.86 8.34 8.83 page 984, the piston speed should be 100 to 200 mm per
force (N) Retracted 6.86 15.98 20.50 20.01 second.
4.22
Operating temperature range (°C) 5 to 60 Note 3) Use at a speed within the absorption capacity range. Refer to
∗ The shock absorber service life is different from that of the MY1M cylinder page 984.
depending on operating conditions. Refer to the RB Series Specific Product
Precautions for the replacement period.
Standard Stroke
Made to Order Specifications
Bore size Maximum manufacturable stroke
(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1565.) Standard stroke (mm) ∗
(mm) (mm)
16 3000
—XB11 Long stroke 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700
20, 25, 32, 40 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600
—XC67 NBR rubber lining in dust seal band 1800, 2000 5000
50, 63
—X416 Holder mounting bracket Ι ∗ Strokes are manufacturable in 1 mm increments, up to the maximum stroke. However, when
exceeding a 2000 mm stroke, specify “-XB11” at the end of the model number.
—X417 Holder mounting bracket ΙΙ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
981
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 982
Series MY1M
Theoretical Output
(N)

(mm) (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
16 200 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
20 314 62 94 125 157 188 219 251
25 490 98 147 196 245 294 343 392
32 804 161 241 322 402 483 563 643
40 1256 251 377 502 628 754 879 1005
50 1962 392 588 784 981 1177 1373 1569
63 3115 623 934 1246 1557 1869 2180 2492
Mass
(kg)

mass mass mass
16 0.67 0.12 0.01 0.03 0.04 —
20 1.11 0.16 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.08
25 1.64 0.24 0.02 0.07 0.11 0.18
32 3.27 0.38 0.04 0.14 0.23 0.39
40 5.88 0.56 0.08 0.25 0.34 0.48
50 10.06 0.77 0.08 0.36 0.51 0.81
63 16.57 1.11 0.17 0.68 0.83 1.08
Calculation: (Example) MY1M25-300A
• Basic mass ·················1.64 kg • Cylinder stroke····300 st
• Additional mass ······0.24/50 st 1.64 + 0.24 x 300 ÷ 50 + 0.07 x 2 ≅ 3.22 kg
• Mass of A unit ············ 0.07 kg
Option
Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Unit no.
Left MYM-A16A1 MYM-A20A1 MYM-A25A1 MYM-A32A1 MYM-A40A1 MYM-A50A1 MYM-A63A1
A unit
Right MYM-A16A2 MYM-A20A2 MYM-A25A2 MYM-A32A2 MYM-A40A2 MYM-A50A2 MYM-A63A2
Left MYM-A16L1 MYM-A20L1 MYM-A25L1 MYM-A32L1 MYM-A40L1 MYM-A50L1 MYM-A63L1
L unit
Right MYM-A16L2 MYM-A20L2 MYM-A25L2 MYM-A32L2 MYM-A40L2 MYM-A50L2 MYM-A63L2
Left — MYM-A20H1 MYM-A25H1 MYM-A32H1 MYM-A40H1 MYM-A50H1 MYM-A63H1
H unit
Right — MYM-A20H2 MYM-A25H2 MYM-A32H2 MYM-A40H2 MYM-A50H2 MYM-A63H2

L unit H unit
Port Port


Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Type
Side support A MY-S16A MY-S20A MY-S25A MY-S32A MY-S40A MY-S63A
Side support B MY-S16B MY-S20B MY-S25B MY-S32B MY-S40B MY-S63B
982
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 984
Series MY1M
Cushion Capacity
Cushion Selection Absorption Capacity of Air Cushion and Stroke Adjusting Units
<Air cushion>
Air cushions are a standard feature on MY1M16 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1M32 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
mechanically jointed rodless cylinders. The
air cushion mechanism is incorporated to 2000 2000 Hu
nit
mm/s
prevent excessive impact of the piston at 1500 1500
mm/s
Lu Lu
the stroke end during high speed 1000 nit 1000
Air
nit
operation. The purpose of air cushion, Air cus
cus hio
Collision speed
Collision speed
thus, is not to decelerate the piston near hio n
500 n 500
the stroke end. The ranges of load and 400 400
300 300
speed that air cushions can absorb are
within the air cushion limit lines shown in 200 200
the graphs.
100 100
<Stroke adjusting unit with shock 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100
absorber>
Use this unit when operating with a load or m3 max. m2 max. m1 max. m3 max. m2 max. m1 max.
speed exceeding the air cushion limit line, Load mass kg Load mass kg
the effective air cushion stroke range due
to stroke adjustment. MY1M20 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1M40 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
<L unit>
2000 2000
Use this unit when the cylinder stroke is Hu
nit
1500 1500
outside of the effective air cushion range
mm/s
mm/s
1000 1000 Lu
even if the load and speed are within the Air
cus
nit
air cushion limit line, or when the cylinder hio
Hu n
Collision speed
Collision speed
is operated in a load and speed range 500 nit 500
400 Lu 400
above the air cushion limit line or below 300 nit 300
the L unit limit line. Air
cus
200 hio 200
<H unit> n
Use this unit when the cylinder is operated 100 100
in a load and speed range above the L unit 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 400 50 2 3 4 5 10 20 50
limit line and below the H unit limit line.
m3 max. m2 max. m1 max. m3 max. m2 max. m1 max.
Caution
1. Refer to the figure below when
MY1M25 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1M50 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
using the adjusting bolt to
perform stroke adjustment. 2000 2000 Hu
1500
Hu 1500
nit
When the effective stroke of the shock nit
Lu
mm/s
mm/s
absorber decreases as a result of stroke 1000 Lu 1000 Air nit

Air nit cus
adjustment, the absorption capacity cus hio
hio n
n
Collision speed
Collision speed
decreases dramatically. Secure the 500 500

400 400
adjusting bolt at the position where it
300 300
protrudes approximately 0.5 mm from the
200 200
shock absorber.
Adjusting bolt
100 100
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100

0.5
Shock absorber
MY1M63 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
2000 Hu
2. Do not use a shock absorber together 1500
nit
mm/s
with air cushion. Lu

1000 Air ni
cus t
Air Cushion Stroke (mm) hio
n
Collision speed
500
Bore size (mm) Cushion stroke 400
16 12 300
20 15 200
25 15
32 19 100
2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100
40 24
50 30 m3 max. m2 max. m1 max.
63 37 Load mass kg
984
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 985

Note) Although the lock plate may slightly bend

Tightening Torque for Stroke
Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts
Precautions due to tightening of the lock plate holding
bolt, this does not a affect the shock
(N.m)
absorber and locking function.
Bore size (mm) Unit Tightening torque Be sure to read before handling. Refer
A to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety
16 0.7
L Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
A Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
20 L 1.8
MY1B
H
A Caution MY1M
3.5 Use caution not to get your hands
25 L
H 5.8 caught in the unit.
• When using a product with stroke adjusting MY1C
A
5.8 unit, the space between the slide table
32 L
(slider) and the stroke adjusting unit MY1H
H 13.8
becomes narrow at the stroke end, causing
A a danger of hands getting caught. Install a MY1HT
40 L 13.8 protective cover to prevent direct contact
H with the human body.
MY1W
A Unit holding bolt
Adjusting bolt
50 L 13.8 Lock nut Lock plate MY2C
H holding bolt
A
MY2H
63 L 27.5
H MY3A
MY3B
Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting MY3M
Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts (N.m)
Bore size (mm) Unit Tightening torque Lock plate
Shock absorber
L 1.2
25 <Fastening of unit>
H 3.3
L 3.3 The unit can be secured by evenly
32 tightening the four unit holding bolts.
H 10
L 3.3
40
H 10 Caution
adjusting unit fixed in an
Calculation of Absorbed Energy for Stroke intermediate position.
Adjusting Unit with Shock Absorber (N.m) When the stroke adjusting unit is fixed in
Horizontal Vertical Vertical an intermediate position, slippage can
collision (Downward) (Upward) occur depending on the amount of energy
released at the time of an impact. In such
s υ cases, the use of the adjusting bolt
Type of m m s mounting brackets, available per made-to-
impact υ
s order specifications -X416 and -X417, is
recommended.
υ m
For other lengths, please consult with SMC
(Refer to “Tightening Torque for Stroke
Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts”.)
–– m·υ2
Kinetic energy 1
E1 2 <Stroke adjustment with adjusting bolt>
Thrust energy Loosen the adjusting bolt lock nut, and
F·s F·s + m·g·s F·s – m·g·s adjust the stroke from the lock plate side
E2
using a hexagon wrench. Retighten the
Absorbed energy
E E1 + E2 lock nut.
<Stroke adjustment with shock absorber>
Symbol
υ: Speed of impact object (m/s) Loosen the two lock plate holding bolts,
F: Cylinder thrust (N) turn the shock absorber and adjust the
s: Shock absorber stroke (m) stroke. Then, uniformly tighten the lock
m: Mass of impact object (kg) plate holding bolts to secure the shock D-
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) absorber.
Note) The speed of the impact object is measured at
the time of impact with the shock absorber.
Take care not to over-tighten the holding -X
bolts. (Except ø16, ø20, ø50, ø63)
(Refer to “Tightening Torgue for Stroke Individual
Adjusting Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts”.) -X
Technical
data
985
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 986
Series MY1M
MY1M16 to 63
33 22 9 21 20 19 12 13 4 5 29 7 8 6 47 2 2
18
3 MY1M16/20/50/63
48
MY1M16/20 45
15 14 17
44 24 23 28 15 14 17 32 27 11 35 42
36
37 MY1M16/20 MY1M63
41
24
25 43
38 MY1M16/20
26 10
34 36
MY1M50/63
16 31
39 40
986
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 987

MY1M16 to 63
Component Parts
1 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 27 Spacer Stainless steel
2 Head cover WR Aluminum alloy Painted 28 Backup spring Stainless steel
3 Head cover WL Aluminum alloy Painted 29 Spring pin Carbon tool steel Black zinc chromated
4 Slide table Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 31 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated MY1B
5 Piston yoke Aluminum alloy Chromated 32 Hexagon socket button head screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
6 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 33 Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated/Nickel plated MY1M
7 End cover Special resin 35 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated
8 Wear ring Special resin 36 Magnet —
9 Cushion ring Brass 37 Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated MY1C
10 Cushion needle Rolled steel Nickel plated 38 Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated
11 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated 40 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated MY1H
12 Belt separator Special resin 41 Magnet holder Special resin (ø16, ø20)
Nickel plated
13
14
Coupler
Guide roller
Sintered iron material
Special resin
42
43
Hexagon socket head cap screw
Type CR retaining ring
Chromium molybdenum steel
Spring steel
MY1HT
15 Guide roller shaft Stainless steel 45 Head plate Aluminum alloy Hard anodized (ø63)
18 Belt clamp Special resin 47 Port cover Special resin (ø25 to ø40) MY1W
23 Adjusting arm Aluminum alloy Chromated 48 Lube retainer Special resin (ø16, ø20)
24 Bearing R Special resin MY2C
25 Bearing L Special resin
26 Bearing S Special resin
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
No. Description Qty. MY1M16 MY1M20 MY1M25 MY1M32 MY1M40 MY1M50 MY1M63 MY3M
16 Seal belt 1 MY16-16A- Stroke MY20-16A- Stroke MY25-16A- Stroke MY32-16A- Stroke MY40-16A- Stroke MY50-16A- Stroke MY63-16A- Stroke
17 Dust seal band 1 MY16-16B- Stroke MY20-16B- Stroke MY25-16B- Stroke MY32-16B- Stroke MY40-16B- Stroke MY50-16B- Stroke MY63-16B- Stroke
34 O-ring 2 ø4 x ø1.8 x ø1.1 ø5.1 x ø3 x ø1.05 ø5.1 x ø3 x ø1.05 ø7.15 x ø3.75 x ø1.7 ø8.3 x ø4.5 x ø1.9 C4 C4
44 Side scraper 2 MYM50-15CK0502B MYM63-15CK0503B
19 Scraper 2
20 Piston seal 2
21 Cushion seal 2 MY1M16-PS MY1M20-PS MY1M25-PS MY1M32-PS MY1M40-PS MY1M50-PS MY1M63-PS
22 Tube gasket 2
39 O-ring 4
∗ Seal kit includes !9, @0, @1, @2 and #9. Order the seal kit based on each bore size.
depending on the treatmentof the hexagon socket head set screw #3.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
987
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 988
Series MY1M
MY1M16쏔/20쏔 Stroke
(LL) L 4 x MM depth M 2 x 2 x øB counterbore depth C

PA øLD through-hole
LW
U1
U3 U2
QW
NW
PB
U6
U4
U5
Detailed figure of U section PG Q + Stroke
U M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 W
(Hexagon socket head plug) (Port) 1
NE
LH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NH
NC
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT Auto switch TT UU
2 x M5 x 0.8 GA M5 x 0.8 magnet holder GA 2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) G (Port) Cushion needle G (Hexagon socket head plug)
M5 x 0.8 GB
Z + Stroke M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8 (Port)
2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
M5 x 0.8
XX
XX

M5 x 0.8
(Port)
VV 2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x M5 x 0.8 VV
MY1M쏔G (Hexagon socket head plug) (Hexagon socket head plug)
MY1M쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GA GB H J K L LD LH LL LW M MM N NC NE NH NW PA
MY1M16쏔 80 6 3.5 13.5 8.5 16.2 40 M5 x 0.8 10 80 3.6 22.5 40 54 6 M4 x 0.7 20 14 28 27.7 56 40
MY1M20쏔 100 7.5 4.5 12.5 12.5 20 46 M6 x 1 12 100 4.8 23 50 58 7.5 M5 x 0.8 25 17 34 33.7 60 50
(mm) Detailed Dimensions of U Section (mm)

Model PB PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV W WW XX Z Model U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6
MY1M16쏔 40 3.5 7.5 153 9 48 11 2.5 15 14 10 68 13 30 160 MY1M16쏔 5.5 3 2 3.4 5.8 5
MY1M20쏔 40 4.5 11.5 191 10 45 14.5 5 18 12 12.5 72 14 32 200 MY1M20쏔 5.5 3 2 3.4 5.8 5.5
2 x ød Y
R
S
øD
WX
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring)

MY1M16쏔 30 6.5 9 4 8.4 1.1
C6
MY1M20쏔 32 8 6.5 4 8.4 1.1
988
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 989

MY1M25쏔/32쏔/40쏔 Stroke
U1 (LL) L 4 x MM depth M 2 x 2 x øB counterbore depth C

U3 U2 PA øLD through-hole
LW
U6
MY1B
QW
NW
PB
MY1M
U4
U5

MY1C
U P P W MY1H
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) (Port)
NE
MY1HT
QQ
QQ
LH
SS
SS
H
NH
MY1W
NC
PP2
RR1
PP1
RR2
UU TT G P G TT UU
MY2C
Cushion needle
2xP (Port) P GB MW
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) A (Hexagon socket head taper plug) N 2xP
MY2H
Z + Stroke (Hexagon socket head taper plug) MY3A
MY3B
P 2 x 2 x J depth K P
(WW)
MY3M
(WW)

taper plug)
XX
XX
P
taper plug) VV 2 x ZZ 2 x ZZ VV (Port)
MY1M쏔G MY1M쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GB H J K L LD LH LL LW M MM MW N NC NE NH NW P PA
MY1M25쏔 110 9 5.5 17 24.5 54 M6 x 1 9.5 102 5.6 27 59 70 10 M5 x 0.8 66 30 21 41.8 40.5 60 Rc1/8 60
MY1M32쏔 140 11 6.5 19 30 68 M8 x 1.25 16 132 6.8 35 74 88 13 M6 x 1 80 37 26 52.3 50 74 Rc1/8 80
MY1M40쏔 170 14 8.5 23 36.5 84 M10 x 1.5 15 162 8.6 38 89 104 13 M6 x 1 96 45 32 65.3 63.5 94 Rc1/4 100
Detailed Dimensions
(mm) of U Section (mm)
Model PB PG PP1 PP2 Q QQ QW RR1 RR2 SS TT UU VV W WW XX Z ZZ Model U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6
MY1M25쏔 50 7 12.7 17.2 206 16 46 18.9 17.9 4.1 15.5 16 16 84 11 38 220 Rc 1/16 MY1M25쏔 5.5 3 2 3.4 5.8 5
MY1M32쏔 60 8 15.5 18.5 264 16 60 22 24 4 21 16 19 102 13 48 280 Rc 1/16 MY1M32쏔 5.5 3 2 3.4 5.8 7
MY1M40쏔 80 9 17.5 20 322 26 72 25.5 29 9 26 21 23 118 20 54 340 Rc 1/8 MY1M40쏔 6.5 3.8 2 4.5 7.3 8
2 x ød Y
R
S
øD
WX
Bottom ported (ZZ)

(Applicable O-ring)
D-
Model WX Y S d D R Applicable O-ring -X
MY1M25쏔 38 9 4 6 11.4 1.1
Individual
C9
MY1M32쏔 48 11 6 6 11.4 1.1 -X
MY1M40쏔 54 14 9 8 13.4 1.1 C11.2
Technical
(Machine the mounting side to the dimensions below.) data
989
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 990
Series MY1M
MY1M50/60 Stroke
U1
U3 U2
LW
U6
QW
NW
PB
NH
NF
U4
U5
MY1M63
W
U Rc 3/8 Rc 3/8 W1
LK
NE
LH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NH
NF
NC
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT GA Rc 3/8 Cushion needle GA TT UU
2 x Rc 3/8 G (Port) G 2 x Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) Rc 3/8 GB (Hexagon socket head taper plug)
A (Hexagon socket head taper plug) N
Rc 3/8
Z + Stroke
Rc 3/8
taper plug) 2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
XX
XX
Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket head
Rc 3/8
taper plug) (Port)
VV 2 x Rc 1/4 2 x Rc 1/4 VV
MY1MG MY1MG
(mm)
Model A B C G GA GB H J K L LD LH LK LL LW M MM N NC NE NF NH NW PA
MY1M50 200 17 10.5 27 25 37.5 107 M14 x 2 28 200 11 29 2 100 128 15 M8 x 1.25 47 43.5 84.5 81 83.5 118 120
MY1M63 230 19 12.5 29.5 27.5 39.5 130 M16 x 2 32 230 13.5 32.5 5.5 115 152 16 M10 x 1.5 50 56 104 103 105 142 140
Detailed Dimensions of
(mm) U Section (mm)
Model PB PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV W W1 WW XX Z Model U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6
MY1M50 90 10 26 380 28 90 35 10 35 24 28 144 128 22 74 400 MY1M50 6.5 3.8 2 4.5 7.3 8
MY1M63 110 12 42 436 30 110 49 13 43 28 30 168 152 25 92 460 MY1M63 8.5 5 2.5 5.5 8.4 8
2 x ød Y
R
S
WX
øD
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring)

MY1M50 74 18 8 10 17.5 1.1
C15
MY1M63 92 18 9 10 17.5 1.1
990
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 991


With adjusting bolt
MY1M Bore size 쏔 Stroke A
h
E
EA
MY1B
EB
W
MY1M
MY1M50/63
TT
FC
MY1C
MY1H
EY
EC
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY1M16 14.6 7 30 5.8 39.5 14 3.6 5.4 (Max. 11) 58
MY1M20 20 10 32 5.8 45.5 14 3.6 5 (Max. 11) 58
MY2H
MY1M25 24 12 38 6.5 53.5 13 3.5 5 (Max. 16.5) 70
MY1M32 29 14 50 8.5 67 17 4.5 8 (Max. 20) 88 MY3A
MY1M40 35 17 57 10 83 17 4.5 9 (Max. 25) 104
MY3B
MY1M50 40 20 66 14 106 26 5.5 13 (Max. 33) 128
MY3M
MY1M63 52 26 77 14 129 31 5.5 13 (Max. 38) 152

MY1M Bore size 쏔 Stroke L
TT
h
h
E F
h
EA
F
EB
W
MY1M16/20

FB F
Shock absorber FC
MY1M50/63
EY
EC
FH
(mm)
MY1M16 14.6 7 30 5.8 39.5 4 14 3.6 40.8 6 5.4 (Max. 11) 58 RB0806
MY1M20 20 10 32 5.8 45.5 4 14 3.6 40.8 6 5 (Max. 11) 58 RB0806
MY1M25 24 12 38 6.5 53.5 6 54 13 13 66 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 16.5) 70 RB1007 D-
MY1M32 29 14 50 8.5 67 6 67 17 16 80 4.5 67.3 12 8 (Max. 20) 88 RB1412
MY1M40 35 17 57 10 83 6 78 17 17.5 91 4.5 67.3 12 9 (Max. 25) 104 RB1412 -X
MY1M50 40 20 66 14 106 6 26 5.5 73.2 15 13 (Max. 33) 128 RB2015
Individual
MY1M63 52 26 77 14 129 6 31 5.5 73.2 15 13 (Max. 38) 152 RB2015 -X
Technical
data
991
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 992
Series MY1M

MY1M Bore size Stroke H
TT
h h
E F
h
EA
EB
W
MY1M16/20
FW F
FB
Shock absorber FC MY1M50/63
Workpiece
EY
a
EC
FH
∗ Since dimension EY of the H type unit is greater than the table top height (dimension H), when mounting a workpiece that exceeds the overall length (dimension L) of the slide
table, allow a clearance of dimension “a” or larger on the workpiece side.

MY1M20 20 10 32 7.7 50 5 14 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 11) 58 RB1007 5
MY1M25 24 12 38 9 57.5 6 52 17 16 66 4.5 67.3 12 5 (Max. 16.5) 70 RB1412 4.5
MY1M32 29 14 50 11.5 73 8 67 22 22 82 5.5 73.2 15 8 (Max. 20) 88 RB2015 6
MY1M40 35 17 57 12 87 8 78 22 22 95 5.5 73.2 15 9 (Max. 25) 104 RB2015 4
MY1M50 40 20 66 18.5 115 8 30 11 99 25 13 (Max. 33) 128 RB2725 9
MY1M63 52 26 77 19 138.5 8 35 11 99 25 13 (Max. 38) 152 RB2725 9.5
992
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 993

Side Support
Side support A
MY-SA
2 x øG
F
2 x øH
MY1B
E
C A
D B
MY1M
Side support B MY1C
MY-SB
MY1H
2xJ MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
E
C A
D B
MY2H
MY3A
Model Applicable bore size A B C D E F G H J MY3B
MY-S16AB MY1M16 61 71.6 15 26 4.9 3 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7
MY-S20AB MY1M20 67 79.6 25 38 6.4 4 8 4.5 M5 x 0.8 MY3M
MY-S25AB MY1M25 81 95 35 50 8 5 9.5 5.5 M6 x 1
MY-S32AB MY1M32 100 118 45 64 11.7 6 11 6.6 M8 x 1.25
MY1M40 120 142
MY-S40AB 55 80 14.8 8.5 14 9 M10 x 1.5
MY1M50 142 164
A
MY-S63 B MY1M63 172 202 70 100 18.3 10.5 17.5 11.5 M12 x 1.75
For long stroke operation, the cylinder m kg 200

tube may be deflected depending on its 190
own mass and the load mass. In such a (2100)
180
case, use a side support in the middle
section. The spacing (l) of the support 170
l
must be no more than the values shown 160
in the graph on the right. 150
140
130
(1800)
m 120
Caution
m
l 110
MY1M
Mass
1. If the cylinder mounting surfaces are m 100

not measured accurately, using a side
63
90 (1500)
support may cause poor operation.
MY1
80
Therefore, be sure to level the cylinder
tube when mounting. Also, for long l l 70
M50
MY1
stroke operation involving vibration 60 (1300)
and impact, use of a side support is

M40
50
MY
recommended even if the spacing (1100)

40
1M
value is within the allowable limits

MY
30 (1000)
32
MY Y1M
shown in the graph.

1 M2
1M 16
M
(900)
2. Support brackets are not for mounting; 20
D-
5
20
use them solely for providing support. 10

0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 -X
mm
Support spacing l Individual
-X
Technical
data
993
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 995
Series MY1
Cam Follower Guide Type
C MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Moment resistance,
Cam follower
and available in
long strokes.
Adjusting mechanism
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
995
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 996
Series MY1C Prior to Use


(mm) M1 M2 M3 m1 m2 m3 range of operating limits shown in the
16 6.0 3.0 2.0 18 7 2.1 graphs. Note that the maximum
20 10 5.0 3.0 25 10 3 allowable load value may sometimes
25 15 8.5 5.0 35 14 4.2 be exceeded even within the
MY1C 32 30 14 10 49 21 6 operating limits shown in the graphs.
40 60 23 20 68 30 8.2
load for the selected conditions.
50 115 35 35 93 42 11.5
63 150 50 50 130 60 16
Load mass (kg)

m1
m2
m3
Moment (N·m)

L2
L1
L3

∗ To evaluate, use υa (average speed) for (1) and (2), and υ (collision speed υ = 1.4υa) Maximum Load Mass
Select the load from within the range
Mmax for (2) and (3) from the maximum allowable moment graph (M1, M2, M3).
that the maximum allowable moment
Σα = Maximum allowable load [m max] + Allowable static moment [Mmax] +
load factors ≤1 value may sometimes be exceeded
Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax] even within the operating limits shown
in the graphs. Therefore, also check
Note 2) Moment caused by the impact load equivalent at the stroke end (at the time of impact with stopper). the allowable moment for the selected
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the workpiece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum conditions.
of the load factors (∑α) is the total of all such moments.

consideration.
,
F: Load (N) L1: Distance to the load s center of gravity (m)
υa: Average speed (mm/s) δ: Damper coefficient At collision: υ = 1.4υa
M: Static moment (N·m) With rubber bumper = 4/100
(MY1B10, MY1H10)
υ = 1.4υa (mm/s) FE = 1.4υa·δ·m·g
Note 4)
Note 5)
∴ME = 3 ·FE·L1 = 4.57υaδmL1 (N·m)
1 With shock absorber = 1/100
Note 5) Average load coefficient (= 13 ): This coefficient is for averaging the maximum load moment at the time of
stopper impact according to service life calculations.
υ
3. For detailed selection procedures, refer to pages 998 and 999. m FE
L1
ME
996
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 997

Cam Follower Guide Type Series MY1C
MY1C/M1 MY1C/M2 MY1C/M3

200
50 50
40 40
100 30 30
MY1B
20 20 MY1M
50
40 MY1C
10 MY1C63 10 MY1C63
30 MY1C63
MY1C50 MY1C50
MY1H
N·m
N·m
N·m
MY1C50
20
5
MY1C40 5 MY1HT
Moment
Moment
Moment
4 4 MY1C40
MY1C40
10 3 3
MY1W
MY1C32
MY1C32
2 2 MY1C32 MY2C
MY1C25
5
4 MY2H
1 MY1C20 1 MY1C25
3 MY1C25 MY3A
MY3B
2 MY1C20 MY1C16 MY1C20
0.5 0.5 MY3M
MY1C16
MY1C16
1
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
MY1C/m1 MY1C/m2 MY1C/m3

30
200
20
100 100
10
50 50
40 40
30 30 5
MY1C63
kg
kg
kg
4
20 20
MY1C50 MY1C63
3
Load mass
Load mass
Load mass
MY1C40
MY1C63 MY1C50
10 MY1C32 10 2
MY1C50 MY1C40
MY1C25
MY1C40 MY1C32
5 MY1C20 5
1
4 4 MY1C32
MY1C16 MY1C25
3 3 MY1C25
MY1C20
2 2 MY1C20 0.5
0.4 MY1C16 D-
MY1C16
1 1
0.3 -X
0.2 Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 -X
Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Technical
data
997
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 998
Series MY1C
Model Selection
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1C to your application.
Cylinder····························· MY1C40-500
Average operating speed υa ··· 300 mm/s 1. Horizontal z 2. Wall
mounting
y
Mounting orientation·············Ceiling mounting mounting P. 948
P. 978
Cushion·····················Air cushion x
(δ = 1/100) Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (880 g) y z
x
MY1C40-500 Wd: Workpiece (500 g) 3. Ceiling x

mounting
4. Vertical
mounting
P. 1042 z
y y
x
z
Wb: MGGLB25-200(4.35kg)
Wc: MHL2-16D1 (795 g) For actual examples of calculation for each orientation,
2. Load Blocking
42.5
Mass and Center of Gravity

5
Y
for Each Workpiece
111 Center of gravity
Workpiece no. Mass
210 Wn mn X-axis Y-axis Z-axis
Xn Yn Zn
Z
Wa 0.88 kg 65 mm 0 mm 5 mm
Y
Wb 4.35 kg 150 mm 0 mm 42.5 mm
X Wc 0.795 kg 150 mm 111 mm 42.5 mm
65 Wd 0.5 kg 150 mm 210 mm 42.5 mm
150 n=a, b, c, d
m2 = Σmn
= 0.88 + 4.35 + 0.795 + 0.5 = 6.525 kg
1
X = x Σ (mn x xn)
m2
1
= (0.88 x 65 + 4.35 x 150 + 0.795 x 150 + 0.5 x 150) = 138.5 mm
6.525
1
Y = x Σ (mn x yn)
m2
1
= (0.88 x 0 + 4.35 x 0 + 0.795 x 111 + 0.5 x 210) = 29.6 mm
6.525
1
Z = x Σ (mn x zn)
m2
1
= (0.88 x 5 + 4.35 x 42.5 + 0.795 x 42.5 + 0.5 x 42.5) = 37.4 mm
6.525

m2: Mass
m2 max (from (1) of graph MY1C/m2) = 30 (kg)·······················································
Load factor α1 = m2/m2 max = 6.525/30 = 0.22
m2
M1: Moment
M1 max (from (2) of graph MY1C/M1) = 60 (N·m)················································································
M1 = m2 x g x X = 6.525 x 9.8 x 138.5 x 10–3 = 8.86 (N·m)
m2
M1
998
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 999

M2: Moment
M2 max (from (3) of graph MY1C/M2) = 23.0 (N·m)··································································
M2 = m2 x g x Y = 6.525 x 9.8 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 1.89 (N·m) MY1B
m2
Load factor α3 = M2/M2 max = 1.89/23.0 = 0.08 MY1M
M2 MY1C
MY1H
FE = 1.4υa x δ x m x g = 1.4 x 300 x
1
x 6.525 x 9.8 = 268.6 (N)
MY1HT
100
M1E: Moment MY1W
M1E max (from (4) of graph MY1C/M1 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 42.9 (N·m)··············· M1E
1 1
MY2C
M1E = x FE x Z = x 268.6 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 3.35 (N·m)
3 3 MY2H
FE
M1
MY3A
M3E: Moment MY3B
M3E max (from (5) of graph MY1C/M3 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 14.3 (N·m)······························
MY3M
M3E =
1 x FE x Y = 1 x 268.6 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 2.65 (N·m)
3 3 M3E
FE
M3
∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 + α5 = 0.72 ≤ 1
decreasing the speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series. This calculation can be easily made using the
“SMC Pneumatics CAD System”.
MY1C/m2 MY1C/M1 MY1C/M2 MY1C/M3

200
50 50
40 40
100
100
30 (3) 30
(2)
20 20
50 50 (4) (5)
40 40
(1) 10 MY1C63
30 30 MY1C63 10 MY1C63
Load mass (kg)
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
MY1C50 MY1C50 MY1C50

20 20
5 5
MY1C40
MY1C63 4 4 MY1C40
MY1C40
10
MY1C50 10 3 3
MY1C32
MY1C40 2
MY1C32 2 MY1C32
5 MY1C25
4 MY1C32 5
3 4
MY1C25
2 MY1C20
3 MY1C25
1 MY1C20 1 MY1C25
D-
2 MY1C20 MY1C16 MY1C20
MY1C16
1
0.5 0.5
MY1C16
-X
MY1C16
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
1
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
Individual
-X
Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s)
Technical
data
999
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1000

Cam Follower Guide Type
Series MY1C
ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
How to Order
Cam follower guide type MY1C 25 300 M9BW

Cam follower guide type
Bore size Auto switch
Made to Order
16 16 mm Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)
Port thread type Piping Refer to page 1001
20 20 mm Symbol Type Bore size Nil Standard type Applicable auto switches vary for details.
25 25 mm
M thread ø16, ø20 G Centralized piping type
depending on the bore size. Select
32 32 mm Nil an applicable one referring to the
Rc ø25, ø32, table below.
Number of auto
40 40 mm switches
TN NPT ø40, ø50,
Cylinder stroke (mm)
50 50 mm
G Suffix for stroke Nil 2 pcs.
TF ø63 Refer to “Standard Stroke”
63 63 mm adjusting unit S 1 pc.
on page 1001.
Nil Both ends n “n” pcs.
Stroke adjusting unit S One end
Nil Without adjusting unit Note) “S” is applicable for stroke adjusting units A, L and H.
L With low load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt Shock Absorbers for L and H Units
H With high load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
AH With one A unit and one H unit each L unit RB0806 RB1007 RB1412 RB2015
LH With one L unit and one H unit each H unit — RB1007 RB1412 RB2015 RB2725
Note) MY1C16 is not available with H unit.
Indicator light

DC AC
ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø63 ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø63 (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
M9NV ∗∗ M9N ∗∗
3-wire (NPN)
[Y69A] [Y59A]
[—]
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9PV ∗∗ M9P ∗∗
— 3-wire (PNP)
Solid state switch
[Y7PV] [Y7P] [—]

M9BV ∗∗ M9B ∗∗
2-wire 12V —
[Y69B] [Y59B] [—] Relay,
Grommet Yes 24V —
3-wire (NPN)
[Y7NWV] [Y7NW]
[—]

5V, 12V IC circuit
[Y7PWV] [Y7PW]

[—]
2-wire 12V
[Y7BWV] [Y7BW]
—
[—]
Reed switch
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
— 5V — A96V — A96 Z76 — — — IC circuit —
Yes
— Grommet A93V — A93 — — — —
100V — Relay,
2-wire 24V 12V — — — Z73 — — PLC
1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-M9type cannot be mounted on ø40.
1000
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1001

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Fluid Air
Cushion Air cushion
1000 or less +1.8
Stroke length tolerance 0
2700 or less +1.8
0 , 2701 to 5000 +2.8
1001 to 3000 +2.8
0
0
MY1M
Piping Front/Side port M5 x 0.8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Rc 3/8
JIS Symbol
port size Bottom port ø4 ø5 ø6 ø8 ø10 ø11 MY1C
MY1H

Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
MY1W
Unit symbol A L A L H A L H A L H A L H A L H A L H
RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB
Configuration With 0806 With 0806 1007 With 1007 1412 With 1412 2015 With 1412 2015 With 2015 2725 With 2015 2725 MY2C
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
Shock absorber model adjusting with adjusting with with adjusting with with adjusting with with adjusting with with adjusting with with adjusting with with
bolt adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting
bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt MY2H
Fine stroke adjustment range (mm) 0 to –5.6 0 to –6 0 to –11.5 0 to –12 0 to –16 0 to –20 0 to –25
MY3A
MY3M

RB RB RB RB RB Bore size (mm) 16 to 63
Model
0806 1007 1412 2015 2725 Without stroke adjusting unit 100 to 1000 mm/s
Max. energy absorption (J) 2.9 5.9 19.6 58.8 147 Stroke A unit 100 to 1000 mm/s (1)
Stroke absorption (mm) 6 7 12 15 25 adjusting unit L unit and H unit 100 to 1500 mm/s (2)
Max. collision speed (mm/s) 1500 Note 1) Be aware that when the stroke adjusting range is increased by
manipulating the adjusting bolt, the air cushion capacity decreases.
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min) 80 70 45 25 10 Also, when exceeding the air cushion stroke ranges on page 1004, the
Spring Extended 1.96 4.22 6.86 8.34 8.83 piston speed should be 100 to 200 mm per second.
force (N) Note 2) The piston speed is 100 to 1000 mm/s for centralized piping.
Retracted 4.22 6.86 15.98 20.50 20.01 Note 3) Use at a speed within the absorption capacity range. Refer to page
Operating temperature range (°C) 5 to 60 1004.
The shock absorber service life is different from that of the MY1C cylinder depending
on operating conditions. Refer to the RB Series Specific Product Precautions for the
replacement period.

(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1565.)
Bore size Maximum manufacturable stroke
Standard stroke (mm) ∗
Symbol Specifications (mm) (mm)
—XB11 Long stroke 16 3000
—XC56 With knock pin hole 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,700
20, 25, 32, 40 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600
—XC67 NBR rubber lining in dust seal band 1800, 2000 5000
50, 63
∗ Strokes are manufacturable in 1 mm increments, up to the maximum stroke. However, when exceeding a
—X416 Holder mounting bracket Ι
2000 mm stroke, specify “-XB11” at the end of the model number.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1001
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1002
Series MY1C
Theoretical Output
(N)

(mm) (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
16 200 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
20 314 62 94 125 157 188 219 251
25 490 98 147 196 245 294 343 392
32 804 161 241 322 402 483 563 643
40 1256 251 377 502 628 754 879 1005
50 1962 392 588 784 981 1177 1373 1569
63 3115 623 934 1246 1557 1869 2180 2492
Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm ) 2
Mass
(kg)

mass mass mass
16 0.67 0.12 0.01 0.03 0.04 —
20 1.06 0.15 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.08
25 1.58 0.24 0.02 0.07 0.11 0.18
32 3.14 0.37 0.04 0.14 0.23 0.39
40 5.60 0.52 0.08 0.25 0.34 0.48
50 10.14 0.76 0.08 0.36 0.51 0.81
63 16.67 1.10 0.17 0.68 0.83 1.08
Calculation: (Example) MY1C25-300A
• Basic mass ····················· 1.58 kg • Cylinder stroke··········300 st
• Additional mass ·········· 0.24/50 st 1.58 + 0.24 x 300 ÷ 50 + 0.07 x 2 ≅ 3.16 kg
• Mass of A unit ················ 0.07 kg
Option
Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Unit no.
A unit
L unit
Left — MYM-A20H1 MYM-A25H1 MYM-A32H1 MYM-A40H1 MYM-A50H1 MYM-A63H1
H unit
Right — MYM-A20H2 MYM-A25H2 MYM-A32H2 MYM-A40H2 MYM-A50H2 MYM-A63H2

L unit H unit
Port Port

Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Type
1002
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1004
Series MY1C
Cushion Capacity
<Air cushion>
Air cushions are a standard feature on MY1C16 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1C32 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
mechanically jointed rodless cylinders.
The air cushion mechanism is 2000 2000
Hu
nit
incorporated to prevent excessive impact 1500 1500
mm/s
mm/s
Lu
of the piston at the stroke end during high Lu nit
1000 nit 1000
Air
speed operation. The purpose of air Air
c
cus
hio
ush n
Collision speed
Collision speed
cushion, thus, is not to decelerate the 500
ion
500
piston near the stroke end. 400 400
cushions can absorb are within the air 200 200

cushion limit lines shown in the graphs.
<Stroke adjusting unit with shock absorber> 100 100
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100
Use this unit when operating with a load or
speed exceeding the air cushion limit line, m3 max. m2 max. m1 max. m3 max. m2 max. m1 max.
or when cushioning is necessary because Load mass kg Load mass kg
the cylinder stroke is outside of the
effective air cushion stroke range due to
stroke adjustment. MY1C20 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1C40 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
L unit
Use this unit when the cylinder stroke is 2000 2000
Hu
mm/s
mm/s
1500 1500 nit
outside of the effective air cushion range
even if the load and speed are within the 1000 1000 Lu
Air nit
air cushion limit line, or when the cylinder cus
Collision speed
Collision speed
hion
Hu
is operated in a load and speed range 500 ni 500
above the air cushion limit line or below 400 Lu t 400
nit 300
300 Air
the L unit limit line. cus
hio
200 n 200
H unit
Use this unit when the cylinder is operated 100
100
in a load and speed range above the L unit 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 2 3 4 5 10 20 50
limit line and below the H unit limit line.
Caution Load mass kg Load mass kg
1. Refer to the figure below when using the

adjusting bolt to perform stroke MY1C25 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1C50 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
adjustment.
When the effective stroke of the shock 2000 2000
Hu H unit
absorber decreases as a result of stroke 1500 nit 1500
mm/s
mm/s
Lu
adjustment, the absorption capacity 1000 Lu 1000 Air nit
Air nit cus
decreases dramatically. Secure the adjusting cus hio
n
hio
Collision speed
Collision speed
bolt at the position where it protrudes n 500

500
approximately 0.5 mm from the shock 400 400
300 300
absorber.
Adjusting bolt 200 200
100 100
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100
0.5
Shock absorber
2. Do not use a shock absorber together

MY1C63 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
with air cushion. 2000 Hu

1500 nit
mm/s
Lu
Air Cushion Stroke (mm) 1000 Air
cus
nit
hio
Bore size (mm) Cushion stroke n
Collision speed
16 12 500
400
20 15 300
25 15 200
32 19
40 24 100
2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100
50 30
63 37 m3 max. m2 max. m1 max.
Load mass kg
1004
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1005

Tightening Torque for Stroke Note) Although the lock plate may slightly
Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts (N·m) Precautions bend due to tightening of the lock
plate holding bolt, this does not a
Bore size (mm) Unit Tightening torque affect the shock absorber and
A Be sure to read before handling. Refer locking function.
16 0.7
L to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety
A Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
20 L 1.8 Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions. MY1B
H
25
A
L
3.5 Caution MY1M
Use caution not to get your hands
H 5.8
caught in the unit. MY1C
A • When using a product with stroke
5.8
32 L adjusting unit, the space between the slide MY1H
H 13.8 table (slider) and the stroke adjusting unit
A becomes narrow at the stroke end, MY1HT
40 L 13.8 causing a danger of hands getting caught.
Install a protective cover to prevent direct
H
contact with the human body. MY1W
A
Adjusting bolt Unit holding bolt
50 L 13.8
Lock nut
MY2C
H
Lock plate
A
holding bolt MY2H
63 L 27.5
H MY3A
MY3B
Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting MY3M

Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts (N·m)
L 1.2
25 Lock plate Shock absorber
H 3.3
L 3.3 <Fastening of unit>
32 The unit can be secured by evenly
H 10
tightening the four unit holding bolts.
L 3.3
40
H 10
Calculation of Absorbed Energy Caution

for Stroke Adjusting Unit Do not operate with the stroke
with Shock Absorber (N·m) adjusting unit fixed in an intermediate
Horizontal Vertical Vertical position.
collision (Downward) (Upward) When the stroke adjusting unit is fixed in
an intermediate position, slippage can
occur depending on the amount of energy
Type of m
s υ m
s released at the time of an impact. In such
impact υ cases, the use of the adjusting bolt
s
mounting brackets, available per made-to-
υ m order specifications -X416 and -X417, is
recommended.
1 For other lengths, please consult with SMC
m·υ2
Kinetic energy
E1 2 (Refer to “Tightening Torque for Stroke
Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts”.)
Thrust energy
F·s F·s + m·g·s F·s – m·g·s <Stroke adjustment with adjusting bolt>
E2
Loosen the adjusting bolt lock nut, and
Absorbed energy
E E1 + E2 adjust the stroke from the lock plate side
using a hexagon wrench. Retighten the
Symbol lock nut.
υ: Speed of impact object (m/s)
F: Cylinder thrust (N) <Stroke adjustment with shock absorber>
s: Shock absorber stroke (m) Loosen the two lock plate holding bolts,
m: Mass of impact object (kg) turn the shock absorber and adjust the D-
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) stroke. Then, uniformly tighten the lock
Note) The speed of the impact object is measured at plate holding bolts to secure the shock
the time of impact with the shock absorber. -X
absorber.
Take care not to over-tighten the holding Individual
bolts. (Except ø16, ø20, ø50, ø63) -X
(Refer to “Tightening Torgue for Stroke Technical
Adjusting Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts”.) data
1005
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1006
Series MY1C
MY1C16 to 63
41 33 12 32 31 27 8 11 4 5 35 26 7 6 19 42 55 2 18 2
14
3 MY1C16/20/50/63
1
56
10 9 16
MY1C16/20
50
20 52
21 10 9 16
40 30 29 43 SMC
20 18
A
MY1C16/20
MY1C63
MY1C50/63 46 28
17 54
A
49
22 23 38 24
13 44
25 15
34 45
MY1C16/20 39
Section A-A
48 47
1006
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1007

MY1C16 to 63
Component Parts
1 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 26 End Cover Special resin
2 Head cover WR Aluminum alloy Painted 28 Backup plate Special resin
3 Head cover WL Aluminum alloy Painted 29 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated
4 Slide table Aluminum alloy Electroless nickel plated 30 Spacer Stainless steel MY1B
5 Piston yoke Aluminum alloy Chromated 35 Spring pin Carbon tool steel Black zinc chromated
6 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 38 Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated MY1M
7 Wear ring Special resin 39 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
8 Belt separator Special resin 40 Hexagon socket button head screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated MY1C
9 Guide roller Special resin 41 Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated/Nickel plated
10 Guide roller shaft Stainless steel 42 Round head Phillips screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
11 Coupler Sintered iron material 43 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated
MY1H
12 Cushion ring Brass 44 Magnet —
13 Cushion needle Rolled steel Nickel plated 45 Magnet holder Special resin MY1HT
14 Belt clamp Special resin 46 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
17 Rail Hard steel wire 47 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated MY1W
18 End spacer Special resin 49 Type CR retaining ring Spring steel
19 End clamp Stainless steel 50
20 Cam follower cap Special resin
Rubber lining (ø25 to ø40)
(ø25 to ø40) 52
Head plate
Side scraper
Aluminum alloy
Special resin
Hard anodized (ø63)
(ø50 to ø63)
MY2C
21 Cam follower — 54 Bushing Aluminum alloy (ø16 to ø20)
22 Eccentric gear Stainless steel 55 Port cover Special resin (ø25 to ø40) MY2H
23 Gear bracket Stainless steel 56 Lube retainer Special resin (ø16 to ø20)
MY3A
24 Adjustment gear Stainless steel MY3B
25 Retaining ring Stainless steel
MY3M
No. Description Qty. MY1C16 MY1C20 MY1C25 MY1C32 MY1C40 MY1C50 MY1C63
15 Seal belt 1 MY16-16A- Stroke MY20-16A- Stroke MY25-16A- Stroke MY32-16A- Stroke MY40-16A- Stroke MY50-16A- Stroke MY63-16A- Stroke
16 Dust seal band 1 MY16-16B- Stroke MY20-16B- Stroke MY25-16B- Stroke MY32-16B- Stroke MY40-16B- Stroke MY50-16B- Stroke MY63-16B- Stroke
52 Side scraper 2 — — — — — MYM50-15CK0502B MYM63-15CK0503B
27 Scraper 2
31 Piston seal 2
33 Tube gasket 2
48 O-ring 4
∗ Seal kit includes @7, #1, #2, #3 and $8. Order the seal kit based on each bore size.
depending on the treatmentof the hexagon socket head set screw $1.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1007
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1008
Series MY1C
MY1C16쏔/20쏔 Stroke

LW
QW
NW
PB
PG Q + Stroke
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 W
NE
LH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NH
NC
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT Auto switch TT UU
2 x M5 x 0.8 GA M5 x 0.8 magnet holder GA 2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) G (Port) Cushion needle G (Hexagon socket head plug)
M5 x 0.8 GB
M5 x 0.8
Z + Stroke (Port)
M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) 2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
M5 x 0.8
XX
XX
(Hexagon socket head plug) M5 x 0.8

(Port)
VV 2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x M5 x 0.8 VV
MY1C쏔G (Hexagon socket head plug) (Hexagon socket head plug) MY1C쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GA GB H J K L LD LH LL LW M MM N NC
MY1C16쏔 80 6 3.5 13.5 8.5 16.2 40 M5 x 0.8 10 80 3.6 22.5 40 54 6 M4 x 0.7 20 14
MY1C20쏔 100 7.5 4.5 12.5 12.5 20 46 M6 x 1 12 100 4.8 23 50 58 7.5 M5 x 0.8 25 17
(mm)
Model NE NH NW PA PB PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV W WW XX Z
MY1C16쏔 28 27.7 56 40 40 3.5 7.5 153 9 48 11 2.5 15 14 10 68 13 30 160
MY1C20쏔 34 33.7 60 50 40 4.5 11.5 191 10 45 14.5 5 18 12 12.5 72 14 32 200
2 x ød Y
R
S
øD
WX
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring)
Hole Sizes for Centralized Piping on the Bottom

MY1C16쏔 30 6.5 9 4 8.4 1.1
C6
MY1C20쏔 32 8 6.5 4 8.4 1.1
1008
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1009

MY1C25쏔/32쏔/40쏔 Stroke

LW
MY1B
QW
NW
PB
MY1M
MY1C
PG Q + Stroke
P P W MY1H
NE
MY1HT
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
LH
H
NH
MY1W
NC
RR2
RR1
PP1
PP2
G
Auto switch
magnet holder TT UU
MY2C
UU TT P Cushion needle G
(Port) GB MW
2xP P
(Hexagon socket head taper plug)
MY2H
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) A N 2xP
Z + Stroke (Hexagon socket head taper plug) MY3A
MY3B
P 2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
P
(Hexagon socket (Port) MY3M
head taper plug)
XX
XX
P
(Hexagon socket P
head taper plug) VV 2 x ZZ 2 x ZZ VV (Port)
MY1C쏔G MY1C쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GB H J K L LD LH LL LW M MM MW N NC NE NH NW P PA
MY1C25쏔 110 9 5.5 17 24.5 54 M6 x 1 9.5 102 5.6 27 59 70 10 M5 x 0.8 66 30 21 41.8 40.5 60 Rc 1/8 60
MY1C32쏔 140 11 6.5 19 30 68 M8 x 1.25 16 132 6.8 35 74 88 13 M6 x 1 80 37 26 52.3 50 74 Rc 1/8 80
MY1C40쏔 170 14 8.5 23 36.5 84 M10 x 1.5 15 162 8.6 38 89 104 13 M6 x 1 96 45 32 65.3 63.5 94 Rc 1/4 100
(mm)
Model PB PG PP1 PP2 Q QQ QW RR1 RR2 SS TT UU VV W WW XX Z ZZ
MY1C25쏔 50 7 12.7 12.7 206 15.5 46 18.9 17.9 4.1 15.5 16 16 84 11 38 220 Rc 1/16
MY1C32쏔 60 8 15.5 18.5 264 16 60 22 24 4 21 16 19 102 13 48 280 Rc 1/16
MY1C40쏔 80 9 17.5 20 322 26 72 25.5 29 9 26 21 23 118 20 54 340 Rc 1/8
2 x ød Y
R
S
øD
WX
Bottom ported (ZZ)

(Applicable O-ring)
D-
MY1C25쏔 38 9 4 6 11.4 1.1
C9 Individual
MY1C32쏔 48 11 6 6 11.4 1.1
-X
MY1C40쏔 54 14 9 8 13.4 1.1 C11.2
Technical
data
1009
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1010
Series MY1C
MY1C50쏔/63쏔 Stroke

LW
QW
NW
PB
NH
NF
MY1C63쏔
PG Q + Stroke
W
Rc 3/8 Rc 3/8 W1
LK
NE
LH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NH
NF
NC
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT GA Rc 3/8 Cushion needle GA TT UU
2 x Rc 3/8 G (Port) G 2 x Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) Rc 3/8 GB (Hexagon socket head taper plug)
A (Hexagon socket head taper plug) N
Rc 3/8 Z + Stroke Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket (Port)
head taper plug)
2 x 2 x J depth K
(WW)
(WW)
XX
XX
Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket Rc 3/8
head taper plug) (Port)
VV 2 x Rc 1/4 2 x Rc 1/4 VV
MY1C쏔G MY1C쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GA GB H J K L LD LH LK LL LW M MM N NC NE
MY1C50쏔 200 17 10.5 27 25 37.5 107 M14 x 2 28 200 11 29 2 100 128 15 M8 x 1.25 47 43.5 84.5
MY1C63쏔 230 19 12.5 29.5 27.5 39.5 130 M16 x 2 32 230 13.5 32.5 5.5 115 152 16 M10 x 1.5 50 60 104
(mm)
Model NF NH NW PA PB PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV W W1 WW XX Z
MY1C50쏔 81 83.5 118 120 90 10 26 380 28 90 35 10 35 24 28 144 128 22 74 400
MY1C63쏔 103 105 142 140 110 12 42 436 30 110 49 13 43 28 30 168 152 25 92 460
2 x ød Y
R
S
WX
øD
Bottom ported (ZZ)

(Applicable O-ring)

MY1C50쏔 74 18 8 10 17.5 1.1
C15
MY1C63쏔 92 18 9 10 17.5 1.1
1010
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1011


With adjusting bolt
MY1C Bore size Stroke A
h
E
EA
MY1B
EB
W
MY1M
h
TT
MY1C50/63 MY1C
FC
MY1H
MY1HT
EY
EC
MY1W

MY2C
MY1C16 14.6 7 30 5.8 39.5 14 3.6 5.4 (Max. 11) 58
MY1C20 20 10 32 5.8 45.5 14 3.6 5 (Max. 11) 58
MY2H
MY1C25 24 12 38 6.5 53.5 13 3.5 5 (Max. 16.5) 70 MY3A
MY1C32 29 14 50 8.5 67 17 4.5 8 (Max. 20) 88 MY3B
MY1C40 35 17 57 10 83 17 4.5 9 (Max. 25) 104
MY1C50 40 20 66 14 106 26 5.5 13 (Max. 33) 128
MY3M
MY1C63 52 26 77 14 129 31 5.5 13 (Max. 38) 152

MY1C Bore size Stroke L
TT
h h
E F
h
EA
F
EB
W
MY1C16/20
FB F
Shock absorber FC
MY1C50/63
EY
EC
FH
(mm)
MY1C16 14.6 7 30 5.8 39.5 4 14 3.6 40.8 6 5.4 (Max. 11) 58 RB0806
MY1C20 20 10 32 5.8 45.5 4 14 3.6 40.8 6 5 (Max. 11) 58 RB0806 D-
MY1C25 24 12 38 6.5 53.5 6 54 13 13 66 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 16.5) 70 RB1007
MY1C32 29 14 50 8.5 67 6 67 17 16 80 4.5 67.3 12 8 (Max. 20) 88 RB1412 -X
MY1C40 35 17 57 10 83 6 78 17 17.5 91 4.5 67.3 12 9 (Max. 25) 104 RB1412
MY1C50 40 20 66 14 106 6 26 5.5 73.2 15 13 (Max. 33) 128 RB2015 Individual
-X
MY1C63 52 26 77 14 129 6 31 5.5 73.2 15 13 (Max. 38) 152 RB2015
Technical
data
1011
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1012
Series MY1C

MY1C Bore size Stroke H
TT h
h h
E F
EA
EB
MY1C16/20
W
Stroke adjusting unit F
MY1C50/63
FW
Shock absorber FB
FC
Workpiece
a
EY
EC
FH
∗ Since dimension EY of the H type unit is greater than the table top height (dimension H), when mounting a workpiece that exceeds the overall length (dimension L) of the slide table,
allow a clearance of dimension “a” or larger on the workpiece side.

MY1C20 20 10 32 7.7 50 5 14 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 11) 58 RB1007 5
MY1C25 24 12 38 9 57.5 6 52 17 16 66 4.5 67.3 12 5 (Max. 16.5) 70 RB1412 4.5
MY1C32 29 14 50 11.5 73 8 67 22 22 82 5.5 73.2 15 8 (Max. 20) 88 RB2015 6
MY1C40 35 17 57 12 87 8 78 22 22 95 5.5 73.2 15 9 (Max. 25) 104 RB2015 4
MY1C50 40 20 66 18.5 115 8 30 11 99 25 13 (Max. 33) 128 RB2725 9
MY1C63 52 26 77 19 138.5 8 35 11 99 25 13 (Max. 38) 152 RB2725 9.5
1012
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1013

Side Support
Side support A
MY-S쏔A
2 x øG
MY1B
F
2 x øH
E
C A
D B MY1M
Side support B MY1C
MY-S쏔B
MY1H
2xJ MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
E
C A
D B
MY2H
(mm) MY3A
MY3B
Model Applicable bore size A B C D E F G H J
MY-S16AB MY1C16 61 71.6 15 26 4.9 3 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7
MY-S20AB MY1C20 67 79.6 25 38 6.4 4 8 4.5 M5 x 0.8
MY3M
MY-S25AB MY1C25 81 95 35 50 8 5 9.5 5.5 M6 x 1
MY-S32AB MY1C32 100 118 45 64 11.7 6 11 6.6 M8 x 1.25
MY1C40 120 142
MY-S40AB 55 80 14.8 8.5 14 9 M10 x 1.5
MY1C50 142 164
A
MY-S63B MY1C63 172 202 70 100 18.3 10.5 17.5 11.5 M12 x 1.75
For long stroke operation, the cylinder m kg 200

own weight and the load weight. In such 180
a case, use a side support in the middle
170
section. The spacing (l ) of the support l
in the graph on the right. 150
140
(2400)
130
m 120
Caution
m
l
110
Mass
1. If the cylinder mounting surfaces are m 100 (2000)

not measured accurately, using a side 90
MY1C

80
Therefore, be sure to level the cylinder (1600)
l l
63
tube when mounting. Also, for long 70

MY1
stroke operation involving vibration 60

C50
(1400)
MY
50
1C4
MY
40 (1200)
1C
0
MY 1C2 6
30 (1000)
shown in the graph.
32
MY 1C1
(900)
D-
M
C2
2. Support brackets are not for mounting; 20

Y
use them solely for providing support.

0
10
0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 -X
mm
Support spacing l Individual
-X
Technical
data
1013
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1015
Series MY1
Linear Guide Type
H MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Uses a linear guide to achieve

high repeatability
Bearing
Linear guide
End lock type capable of

holding a position at the stroke end
(Except bore size ø10)
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1015
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1016
Series MY1H Prior to Use


(mm) M1 M2 M3 m1 m2 m3
10 0.8 1.1 0.8 6.1 6.1 6.1 range of operating limits shown in the
graphs. Note that the maximum
16 3.7 4.9 3.7 10.8 10.8 10.8
allowable load value may sometimes
20 11 16 11 17.6 17.6 17.6 be exceeded even within the
MY1H
25 23 26 23 27.5 27.5 27.5 operating limits shown in the graphs.
32 39 50 39 39.2 39.2 39.2 Therefore, also check the allowable
40 50 50 39 50 50 50 load for the selected conditions.
Load mass (kg)
m1
m2
Moment (N·m) m3

L2
L1
L3

Maximum Load Mass
Mmax for (2) and (3) from the maximum allowable moment graph (M1, M2, M3).
Select the load from within the range
load factors ≤1 that the maximum allowable moment
Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax]
value may sometimes be exceeded
Note 1) Moment caused by the load, etc., with cylinder in resting condition. even within the operating limits shown
Note 2) Moment caused by the impact load equivalent at the stroke end (at the time of impact with stopper). in the graphs. Therefore, also check
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the workpiece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum the allowable moment for the selected
of the load factors (∑α) is the total of all such moments.
conditions.
Use the following formulae to calculate dynamic moment when taking stopper impact
into consideration.
υa: Average speed (mm/s) δ: Damper coefficient
(MY1B10, MY1H10)
υ = 1.4υa (mm/s) FE = 1.4υa·δ·m·g
Note 4)
Note 5)
∴ME = 3 ·FE·L1 = 4.57υaδmL1 (N·m)
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) υ
Note 4) 1.4υaδ is a dimensionless coefficient for calculating impact force. m FE
L1
of stopper impact according to service life calculations. ME

1016
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1017

Linear Guide Type Series MY1H
MY1H/M1 MY1H/M2 MY1H/M3
50 50 50
40 40
40
30
30
30
MY1B
20
20 20 MY1M
10 MY1H40
MY1H32
MY1C
10 10
MY1H40
MY1H32 5 MY1H25
MY1H40
MY1H32
MY1H
N·m
N·m
N·m
4
5 5
4
MY1H25 3 MY1H20 4 MY1H25 MY1HT
Moment
Moment
Moment
3 3
2
MY1W
2 MY1H20 2 MY1H20
1
MY1H16
MY2C
1 1 MY2H
0.5
MY1H16 0.4 MY1H16 MY3A
0.3 MY1H10 MY3B
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.2 MY3M
0.3 0.3
MY1H10 MY1H10
0.2 0.1 0.2
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
MY1H/m1 MY1H/m2 MY1H/m3
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
kg
kg
kg
10 MY1H40 10 MY1H40 10 MY1H40

Load mass
Load mass
Load mass
MY1H32 MY1H32 MY1H32

5 5 5
4 4 4
3 3 3
2 MY1H16 2 MY1H16 2 MY1H16

D-
1 1 1 -X
Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 -X
Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Technical
data
1017
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1018
Series MY1H
Model Selection
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1H to your application.
Operating cylinder ···················· MY1H40-500 Mounting Orientation
Average operating speed υa ··· 300 mm/s z 2. Wall y
1. Horizontal mounting
Mounting orientation ················ Wall mounting mounting
P. 978
Cushion ····································· Air cushion (δ = 1/100) x
y z
x
MY1H40-500 Wb: MGGLB25-200 (4.35 kg)
3. Ceiling x
mounting
P. 998 4. Vertical
mounting
y P. 1042 z y
Wc: MHL2-16D1 (795 g) x
z
Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (880 g) Wd: Workpiece (500 g) For actual examples of calculation for each
orientation, refer to the pages above.
2. Load Blocking
42.5 150 Mass and Center of Gravity
5 65 for Each Workpiece
Center of gravity
Workpiece no. Mass
Z Wn mn X-axis Y-axis Z-axis
X Xn Yn Zn
111
Wa 0.88 kg 65 mm 0 mm 5 mm
210
Y Y Wb 4.35 kg 150 mm 0 mm 42.5 mm

Wc 0.795 kg 150 mm 111 mm 42.5 mm
Wd 0.5 kg 150 mm 210 mm 42.5 mm
n=a, b, c, d
m3 = Σmn
= 0.88 + 4.35 + 0.795 + 0.5 = 6.525 kg
1
X = x Σ (mn x xn)
m3
1
= (0.88 x 65 + 4.35 x 150 + 0.795 x 150 + 0.5 x 150) = 138.5 mm
6.525
1
Y = x Σ (mn x yn)
m3
1
= (0.88 x 0 + 4.35 x 0 + 0.795 x 111 + 0.5 x 210) = 29.6 mm
6.525
1
Z = x Σ (mn x zn)
m3
1
= (0.88 x 5 + 4.35 x 42.5 + 0.795 x 42.5 + 0.5 x 42.5) = 37.4 mm
6.525

m3: Mass
m3 max (from (1) of graph MY1H/m3) = 50 (kg)······················································
Load factor α1 = m3/m3 max = 6.525/50 = 0.13 m3
M2: Moment
Z
m2 max (from (2) of graph MY1H/M2) = 50 (N·m)····················································································
M2 = m3 x g x Z = 6.525 x 9.8 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 2.39 (N·m)
Load factor α2 = M2/M2 max = 2.39/50 = 0.05 m3
M2
1018
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1019

M3: Moment X
M3 max (from (3) of graph MY1H/M3) = 38.7 (N·m)····························································································

M3 = m3 x g x X = 6.525 x 9.8 x 138.5 x 10–3 = 8.86 (N·m) MY1B
m3
Load factor α3 = M3/M3 max = 8.86/38.7 = 0.23
M3 MY1M
5. Calculation of Load Factor for Dynamic Moment MY1C

Equivalent load FE at impact MY1H
FE = 1.4υa x δ x m x g = 1.4 x 300 x
1
x 6.525 x 9.8 = 268.6 (N) MY1HT
100 Z
M1E: Moment
MY1W
M1E max (from (4) of graph MY1H/M1 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 35.9 (N·m)···············
M1E =
1
x FE x Z =
1
x 268.6 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 3.35 (N·m)
M1E MY2C
3 3
FE
M1
MY2H
M3E: Moment MY3A
MY3B
M3E max (from (5) of graph MY1H/M3 where 1.4υa = 420 mm/s) = 27.6 (N·m)···················
1 1 M3E MY3M
M3E = x FE x Y = x 268.6 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 2.65 (N·m)
3 3
Load factor α5 = M3E/M3E max = 2.65/27.6 = 0.10 FE Y
M3

∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 + α5 = 0.60 ≤ 1
decreasing the speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series.
MY1H/m3 MY1H/M1 MY1H/M2 MY1H/M3

(1) (2)
50 50 50 50 (3)
40 40 (4) 40 40
30
30
30 (5)
30
20
20 20
20
10 MY1H40
MY1H32 10
10 MY1H40
kg
N·m
N·m
N·m
MY1H32 MY1H40
10 MY1H40 5 MY1H25 MY1H32
4
5 5
Load mass
MY1H32 MY1H25
4 3 MY1H20 4 MY1H25
Moment
Moment
Moment
MY1H25 3 2 3
5
4 2 MY1H20 2 MY1H20
MY1H20 1
MY1H16
3
1 1
MY1H16 0.5
2
MY1H10
MY1H16 0.4
MY1H10
MY1H16 D-
0.3 0.5
0.5
1
0.4
0.3
0.2 0.4
0.3
-X
MY1H10 MY1H10
0.2 0.1 0.2 Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
-X
Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s
Technical
data
1019
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1020

Linear Guide Type
Series MY1H
ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Linear guide type MY1H 25 300 M9BW

Linear guide type Number of auto switches
Nil 2 pcs.
Bore size S 1 pc.
10 10 mm
Made to Order
n “n” pcs. Refer to page 1021
16 16 mm Port thread type for details.
20 20 mm Symbol Type Bore size Auto switch
25 25 mm M thread ø10, ø16, ø20 Piping Nil Without auto switch (Built-in magnet)
32 32 mm Nil
Rc Nil Standard type ∗ Refer to the table below for the applicable
ø25, ø32,
40 40 mm TN NPT auto switch model.
ø40 G Centralized piping type
TF G Note) For ø10, only G is End lock position
available.
Nil Without end lock
Cylinder stroke(mm) Suffix for stroke adjusting unit E Right end
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 1021. Nil Both ends F Left end
S One end W Both ends
Note) “S” is applicable for ∗ MY1H10 is not available
Stroke adjusting unit stroke adjusting units A, with end lock.
Nil Without adjusting unit L and H. ∗ For end lock positions, refer
to page 1036.
L
With low load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt Shock Absorbers for L and H Units
H
With high load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt Bore size
(mm) 25 16 20 25 32 40
AH With one A unit and one H unit each L unit — RB0806 RB1007 RB1412
LH With one L unit and one H unit each H unit RB0805 — RB1007 RB1412 RB2015
Note) MY1H16 is not available with H unit.
MY1H10 is not available with A and L units.
Indicator
Electrical Wiring Pre-wired

light
Type Special function entry 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load

(Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N
Reed switch Solid state switch
5V,12V IC circuit
— 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P
2-wire 12V M9BV M9B — Relay,
Grommet Yes 24V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW PLC
Diagnostic indication 5V,12V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PWV M9PW
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BWV M9BW —
3-wire —
Yes (NPN equivalent)
— 5V A96V A96 — — — — IC circuit —
— Grommet
2-wire
100V A93V A93 — — — — Relay,
24V 12V
No 100V or less A90V A90 — — — — IC circuit PLC
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··········Nil(Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m··········M (Example) M9NWM
3 m··········L (Example) M9NWL
5 m··········Z (Example) M9NWZ
1020
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1021

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40
Fluid Air
0.2 to 0.8 MPa
Operating pressure range {2.0 to 8.2 kgf/cm2} 0.1 to 0.8 MPa
Cushion Rubber bumper Air cushion
With end lock +1.8
Stroke length tolerance 0 MY1M
Piping Front/Side port M5 x 0.8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4
port size
JIS Symbol Bottom port ø4 ø5 ø6 ø8 MY1C
MY1H
Bore size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40
Unit symbol H A L A L H A L H A L H A L H MY1W
RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB RB
0805 With 0806 With 0806 1007 With 1007 1412 With 1412 2015 With 1412 2015
Configuration + + +
with adjusting with adjusting with
+ +
with adjusting with
+ +
with adjusting with
+ +
with adjusting with
+
with
MY2C
Shock absorber model
adjusting bolt adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting bolt adjusting adjusting
bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt
MY2H
Fine stroke adjustment range (mm) 0 to –10 0 to –5.6 0 to –6 0 to –11.5 0 to –12 0 to –16
Stroke adjustment range When exceeding the stroke fine adjustment range: Utilize a made-to-order specifications “-X416” and “-X417”. MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
RB RB RB RB RB Bore size (mm) 10 16 to 40
Model
0805 0806 1007 1412 2015 Without stroke adjusting unit 100 to 500 mm/s 100 to 1000 mm/s
Max. energy absorption (J) 1.0 2.9 5.9 19.6 58.8 Stroke A unit 100 to 200 mm/s 100 to 1000 mm/s (1)
Stroke absorption (mm) 5 6 7 12 15 adjusting unit L unit and H unit 100 to 1000 mm/s 100 to 1500 mm/s (2)
Max. collision speed (mm/s) 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 Note 1) Be aware that when the stroke adjusting range is increased by
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min) manipulating the adjusting bolt, the air cushion capacity decreases.
80 80 70 45 25 Also, when exceeding the air cushion stroke ranges on page 1023,
Spring Extended 1.96 1.96 4.22 6.86 8.34 the piston speed should be 100 to 200 mm per second.
force (N) Note 2) The piston speed is 100 to 1000 mm/s for centralized piping.
Retracted 3.83 4.22 6.86 15.98 20.50 Note 3) Use at a speed within the absorption capacity range. Refer to page
∗ The shock absorber service life is different from that of the MY1H cylinder
depending on operating conditions. Refer to the RB Series Specific Product
Precautions for the replacement period.
Standard Stroke Lock Specifications

Bore size Standard stroke ∗ Maximum Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40
manufacturable stroke
(mm) (mm) (mm) Lock position One end (Selectable), Both ends
10, 16, 20 50, 100, 150, 200 1000 Holding force (Max.) (N) 110 170 270 450 700
250, 300, 350, 400
25, 32, 40 450, 500, 550, 600 1500 Fine stroke adjusting range (mm) 0 to –5.6 0 to – 6 0 to –11.5 0 to –12 0 to –16
∗ Strokes are manufacturable in 1 mm increments, Backlash 1 mm or less
up to the maximum stroke. However, add “-XB10”
to the end of the part number for non-standard Manual release Possible (Non-lock type)
strokes from 51 to 599. Also when exceeding a
600 mm stroke, specify “-XB11” at the end of the
model number. (Except ø10)
Made to Order Specifications

(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1565.)
—XB10 Intermediate stroke (Using exclusive body) D-
—XB11 Long stroke
—XC56 With knock pin hole -X
—XC67 NBR rubber lining in dust seal band
Individual
-X
—X416 Holder mounting bracket Ι
Technical
data
1021
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1022
Series MY1H
Theoretical Output
(N)
Boresize Piston area Operating pressure (MPa)
(mm) (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
10 78 15 23 31 39 46 54 62
16 200 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
20 314 62 94 125 157 188 219 251
25 490 98 147 196 245 294 343 392
32 804 161 241 322 402 483 563 643
40 1256 251 377 502 628 754 879 1005
Mass
(kg)

mass mass mass
10 0.26 0.08 0.003 — — 0.02
16 0.74 0.14 0.01 0.02 0.04 —
20 1.35 0.25 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.07
25 2.31 0.30 0.02 0.04 0.07 0.11
32 4.65 0.46 0.04 0.08 0.14 0.23
40 6.37 0.55 0.08 0.12 0.19 0.28
Calculation: (Example) MY1H25-300A
• Basic mass ················· 2.31 kg • Cylinder stroke······300 st
• Additional mass ······ 0.30/50 st 2.31 + 0.30 x 300 ÷ 50 + 0.04 x 2 ≅ 4.19 kg
• Mass of A unit ············· 0.06 kg
Option
Bore
(mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40
Unit no.
Left — MYH-A16A1 MYH-A20A1 MYH-A25A1 MYH-A32A1 MYH-A40A1
A unit
Right — MYH-A16A2 MYH-A20A2 MYH-A25A2 MYH-A32A2 MYH-A40A2
Left — MYH-A16L1 MYH-A20L1 MYH-A25L1 MYH-A32L1 MYH-A40L1
L unit
Right — MYH-A16L2 MYH-A20L2 MYH-A25L2 MYH-A32L2 MYH-A40L2
Left MYH-A10H1 — MYH-A20H1 MYH-A25H1 MYH-A32H1 MYH-A40H1
H unit
Right MYH-A10H2 — MYH-A20H2 MYH-A25H2 MYH-A32H2 MYH-A40H2

L unit H unit
Port Port
Bore
(mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40
Type

1022
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1023

Cushion Capacity
Cushion Selection Absorption Capacity of Rubber Bumper, Air cushion and Stroke Adjusting Units
<Rubber bumper>
Rubber bumpers are a standard feature on MY1H10 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1H32 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
MY1H10.
2000
Since the stroke absorption of rubber 1500 2000
bumpers is short, when adjusting the 1500 H unit
stroke with an A unit, install an external 1000 H
mm/s
mm/s
un 1000 Lu
shock absorber. it nit MY1B
The load and speed range which can be 500
Collision speed
Collision speed
absorbed by a rubber bumper is inside the 400 Ru 500
Air
rubber bumper limit line of the graph. 300 bb
er
400 cus
hio
MY1M
bu 300 n
<Air cushion> 200 m pe
Air cushions are a standard feature on r 200
MY1C
mechanically jointed rodless cylinders. 100
The air cushion mechanism is 80 100
incorporated to prevent excessive impact 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 3 5 10 20 30 50 100 MY1H
of the piston at the stroke end during high
m1, m2, m3 max. m1, m2, m3 max.
speed operation. The purpose of air
cushion, thus, is not to decelerate the Load mass kg Load mass kg
MY1HT
piston near the stroke end.
The ranges of load and speed that air MY1W
cushions can absorb are within the air MY1H16 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa MY1H40 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
cushion limit lines shown in the graphs.
<Stroke adjusting unit with shock absorber>
MY2C
2000 2000
Use this unit when operating with a load or 1500 1500 H unit
mm/s
mm/s
speed exceeding the air cushion limit line, 1000 1000
MY2H
or when cushioning is required outside of Lu
the effective air cushion stroke range due Lu
nit MY3A
Collision speed
Collision speed
to stroke adjustment. 500 nit 500 Air MY3B
400 400 cus
L unit hio
Air n
Use this unit when the cylinder stroke is
300 cus
hio
n
300
MY3M
outside of the effective air cushion range 200 200
even if the load and speed are within the
air cushion limit line, or when the cylinder 100 100
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 3 5 10 20 30 50 100 200
is operated in a load and speed range
above the air cushion limit line or below
m1, m2, m3 max. m1, m2, m3 max.
the L unit limit line.
H unit Load mass kg Load mass kg
Use this unit when the cylinder is operated
in a load and speed range above the L unit
limit line and below the H unit limit line. MY1H20 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
Caution 2000
1500
mm/s
1. Refer to the figure below when 1000

using the adjusting bolt to Hu
nit
perform stroke adjustment.
Collision speed
500 Lu
When the effective stroke of the shock 400 nit
300
Air
absorber decreases as a result of stroke cus
h ion
adjustment, the absorption capacity 200
decreases dramatically. Secure the
adjusting bolt at the position where it 100
protrudes approximately 0.5 mm from 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50
the shock absorber.
Adjusting bolt m1, m2, m3 max.
Load mass kg
0.5
MY1H25 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
2000
1500
mm/s
Shock absorber Hu
1000 nit
2. Do not use a shock absorber together Lu
Collision speed
500 nit
with air cushion. 400
Air
cus
Air Cushion Stroke (mm)
300 hion D-
200
Bore size (mm) Cushion stroke
16 12 100
-X
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50
20 15 Individual
25 15 m1, m2, m3 max. -X
32 19 Load mass kg Technical
40 24 data
1023
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1024
Series MY1H
Cushion Capacity
Tightening Torque for Stroke

Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts (N·m)
Bore size (mm) Tightening torque
10 Refer to the adjusting procedures on page 1025.
16 0.7
20 1.8
25 1.8
32 3.5
40 5.8
Calculation of Absorbed Energy

for Stroke Adjusting Unit
with Shock Absorber (N·m)
Horizontal Vertical Vertical
collision (Downward) (Upward)
Type of m
s υ m s
impact υ
s
υ m
m·υ2
Kinetic energy 1
E1 2
Thrust energy
F·s F·s + m·g·s F·s – m·g·s
E2
Absorbed energy
E1 + E2
E
Symbol
υ: Speed of impact object (m/s)
F: Cylinder thrust (N)
s: Shock absorber stroke (m)
m: Mass of impact object (kg)
Note) The speed of the impact object is
measured at the time of impact with the
shock absorber.
Rubber Bumper (ø10 only)

Positive Stroke from
One End Due to Pressure
1
0.9
mm
0.8
0.7
Displacement
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
Pressure MPa
1024
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1025
Series MY1H
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator
and Auto Switch Precautions.
Caution Caution
Use caution not to get your hands caught in the unit. To adjust the stroke adjusting unit of the MY1H10,
• When using a product with stroke adjusting unit, the space follow the step shown below.
between the slide table (slider) and the stroke adjusting unit
becomes narrow at the stroke end, causing a danger of hands MY1B
getting caught. Install a protective cover to prevent direct contact
with the human body. Fine adjustment Holding screw
pitch 10
Fixture
A Body
MY1M
range 10 Lock nut
Fixing O-ring Shock
Adjusting bolt screw (For notch) Adjusting
bolt
absorber MY1C
lock nut Unit holding bolt
MY1H
Guide rail
holding screw
Guide MY1HT
rail
Guide rail holding MY1W

screw pitch 15 A
Section A-A MY2C
Shock absorber MY2H
<Fastening of unit> Adjusting Procedure MY3A
The unit can be secured by evenly tightening the four unit holding 1. Loosen the two lock nuts, and then loosen the holding screws MY3B
bolts. by turning them approximately two turns.
2. Move the body to the notch just before the desired stroke. (The MY3M
notches are found in alternating increments of 5 mm and 10
mm.)
Caution 3. Tighten the holding screw to 0.3 N·m. Make sure that the
Do not operate with the stroke adjusting unit fixed in tightening does not cause excessive torque.
The fixture fits into the fastening hole in the guide rail to prevent
an intermediate position.
slippage, which enables fastening with low torque.
When the stroke adjusting unit is fixed in an intermediate position, 4. Tighten the lock nut to 0.6 N·m.
slippage can occur depending on the amount of energy released 5. Make fine adjustments with the adjusting bolt and shock
at the time of an impact. In such cases, the use of the adjusting absorber.
bolt mounting brackets, available per made-to-order specifications
-X416 and -X417, is recommended. (Except ø10)
For other lengths, please consult with SMC (Refer to “Tightening
Torque for Stroke Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts”.)
<Stroke adjustment with adjusting bolt>
Loosen the adjusting bolt lock nut, and adjust the stroke from the
head cover side using a hexagon wrench. Re-tighten the lock nut.
<Stroke adjustment with shock absorber>
Loosen the two unit holding bolts on the shock absorber side, turn
the shock absorber and adjust the stroke. Then, uniformly tighten
the unit holding bolts to secure the shock absorber.
Take care not to over-tighten the holding bolts. (Except ø10, ø16,
ø20) (Refer to “Tightening Torgue for Stroke Adjusting Unit
Holding Bolts”.)
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1025
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1026
Series MY1H
With End Locks

Recommended Pneumatic Circuit Relation to Cushion
Caution Caution
This is necessary for 1. When the air cushion on the lock mechanism side is in a fully
the correct locking and closed or nearly closed state, there is a possibility that the slide
unlocking actions. table will not reach the stroke end, in which case locking will
not occur.
Adjusting the End Lock Mechanism
Operating Precautions Caution
1. The end lock mechanism is adjusted at the time of shipping.
Caution Therefore, adjustment for operation at the stroke end is
1. Do not use 3 position solenoid valves. unnecessary.
Avoid use in combination with 3 position solenoid valves 2. Adjust the end lock mechanism after the stroke adjusting unit
(especially closed center metal seal types). If pressure is has been adjusted. The adjusting bolt and shock absorber of
trapped in the port on the lock mechanism side, the cylinder the stroke adjusting unit must be adjusted and secured first.
cannot be locked. Locking and unlocking may not occur otherwise.
Furthermore, even after being locked, the lock may be released 3. Perform fine adjustment of the end lock mechanism as follows.
after some time due to air leaking from the solenoid valve and Loosen the lock finger holding bolts, and then adjust by aligning
entering the cylinder. the center of the lock piston with the center of the lock finger
2. Back pressure is required when releasing the lock. hole. Secure the lock finger.
Before starting operation, be sure to control the system so that
air is supplied to the side without the lock mechanism (in case
of locks on both ends, the side where the slide table is not Lock finger
(Hole)
locked) as shown in the figure above. There is a possibility that
the lock may not be released. (Refer to the section on releasing Lock piston
the lock.)
Lock finger
3. Release the lock when mounting or adjusting the cylinder. holding bolt
If mounting or other work is performed when the cylinder is Lock finger
locked, the lock unit may be damaged.
4. Operate at 50% or less of the theoretical output. Releasing the Lock
If the load exceeds 50% of the theoretical output, this may
cause problems such as failure of the lock to release, or Warning
damage to the lock unit.
1. Before releasing the lock, be sure to supply air to the side
5. Do not operate multiple cylinders in synchronization. without the lock mechanism, so that there is no load applied to
Avoid applications in which two or more end lock cylinders are the lock mechanism when it is released. (Refer to the
synchronized to move one workpiece, as one of the cylinder recommended pneumatic circuits.) If the lock is released when
locks may not be able to release when required. the port on the side without the lock is in an exhaust state, and
6. Use a speed controller with meter-out control. with a load applied to the lock unit, the lock unit may be
Lock cannot be released occasionally by meter-in control. subjected to an excessive force and be damaged.
7. Be sure to operate completely to the cylinder stroke Furthermore, sudden movement of the slide table is very
dangerous.
end on the side with the lock.
If the cylinder piston does not reach the end of the stroke, Manual Release
locking and unlocking may not be possible. (Refer to the
section on adjusting the end lock mechanism.)
Caution
Operating Pressure 1. When manually releasing the end lock, be sure to
release the pressure.
Caution If it is unlocked while the air pressure still remains, it will lead to
1. Supply air pressure of 0.15 MPa or higher to the port on the damage a workpiece, etc. due to unexpected lurching.
side that has the lock mechanism, as it is necessary for 2. Perform manual release of the end lock mechanism as follows.
disengaging the lock. Push the lock piston down with a screwdriver, etc., and move
the slide table.
Exhaust Speed b
Caution
1. Locking will occur automatically if the pressure applied to the
port on the lock mechanism side falls to 0.05 MPa or less. In
the cases where the piping on the lock mechanism side is long Other handling precau-
and thin, or the speed controller is separated at some distance tions regarding mount-
from the cylinder port, the exhaust speed will be reduced. Take a ing, piping, and environ-
note that some time may be required for the lock to engage. ment are the same as
In addition, clogging of a silencer mounted on the solenoid the standard series.
valve exhaust port can produce the same effect. Screwdriver, etc.
1026
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1027

Construction: ø10
Centralized piping type
29 25 18 9 8 16 11 4 22 6 7 17 5 14 19 2
MY1B
MY1M
15
MY1C
MY1H
3
MY1HT
1 30
MY1W
20 28 12 24 21 10
MY2C
35
MY2H
31 34
MY3A
MY3B
32 27
23 MY3M
33
37
13 36 26
Component Parts
1 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 22 Spring pin Stainless steel
2 Head cover WR Aluminum alloy Painted 23 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
3 Head cover WL Aluminum alloy Painted 24 Round head Phillips screw Carbon steel Nickel plated
4 Piston yoke Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 25 Hexagon socket head set screw Carbon steel Black zinc chromated
5 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 26 Hexagon socket head plug Carbon steel Nickel plated
6 End cover Special resin 27 Magnet —
7 Wear ring Special resin 28 Slide table Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
8 Bumper Polyurethane rubber 29 Head plate Stainless steel
9 Holder Stainless steel 30 Felt Felt
10 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated 31 Linear guide —
11 Belt separator Special resin 32 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
12 Seal magnet Rubber magnet 33 Square nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
15 Belt clamp Special resin 34 Stopper plate Carbon steel Nickel plated
20 Bearing Special resin 35 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
21 Spacer Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated 36 Guide stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated
37 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
No. Description Qty. MY1H10
13 Seal belt 1 MY10-16A- Stroke
14 Dust seal band 1 MY10-16B- Stroke
16 Scraper 2
17 Piston seal 2
MY1B10—PS
18 Tube gasket 2 D-
19 O-ring 4
∗ Seal kit includes !6, !7, !8 and !9. -X
Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
When !3 and !4 are shipped independently, a grease Individual
pack is included. -X
Order with the following part number when only the
grease pack is needed. Technical
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g) data
1027
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1028
Series MY1H
MY1H16 to 40
28 34 12 33 32 19 8 4 11 5 25 18 7 6 1 2
14
44
23 MY1H16/20
MY1H16/20
9 16 10 39 31 30 42 41 40 22
21
29
17 35
S
15 24 43
23 13
36
38
37
1028
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1029

MY1H16 to 40
Component Parts
1 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 23 Magnet —
2 Head cover WR Aluminum alloy Painted 24 Square nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
3 Head cover WL Aluminum alloy Painted 25 Spring pin Carbon tool steel Black zinc chromated
4 Slide table Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 28 Hexagon socket head set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated/Nickel plated MY1B
5 Piston yoke Aluminum alloy Chromated 29 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
6 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 30 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated MY1M
7 Wear ring Special resin 31 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
8 Belt separator Special resin 36 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated MY1C
9 Guide roller Special resin 38 Hexagon socket head taper plug Carbon steel Nickel plated
10 Guide roller shaft Stainless steel 40 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated
11 Coupler Sintered iron material 41 Spacer Stainless steel
MY1H
12 Cushion ring Brass 42 Hexagon socket button head screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
13 Cushion needle Rolled steel Nickel plated 43 Type CR retaining ring Spring steel MY1HT
14 Belt clamp Special resin 44 Lube retainer Special resin (ø16, ø20)
17 Guide — MY1W
18 End cover Special resin
21
22
Bearing
Guide cover
Special resin
Special resin
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
No. Description Qty. MY1H16 MY1H20 MY1H25 MY1H32 MY1H40 MY3M
15 Seal belt 1 MY16-16A- Stroke MY20-16A- Stroke MY25-16A- Stroke MY32-16A- Stroke MY40-16A- Stroke
16 Dust seal band 1 MY16-16B- Stroke MY20-16B- Stroke MY25-16B- Stroke MY32-16B- Stroke MY40-16B- Stroke
35 O-ring 2 ø4 x ø1.8 x ø1.1 ø4 x ø1.8 x ø1.1 ø5.1 x ø3 x ø1.05 ø7.15 x ø3.75 x ø1.7 ø7.15 x ø3.75 x ø1.7
39 Side scraper 1 MYH16-15BK2900B MYH20-15BK2901B MYH25-15BK2902B MYH32-15BK2903B MYH40-15BK2904B
19 Scraper 2
32 Piston seal 2
33 Cushion seal 2 MY1H16-PS MY1H20-PS MY1H25-PS MY1H32-PS MY1H40-PS
34 Tube gasket 2
37 O-ring 4
∗ Seal kit includes !9, #2, #3, #4 and #7. Order the seal kit based on each bore size.
When !5 and !6 are shipped independently, a grease pack (20 g) is included.
depending on the treatmentof the hexagon socket head set screw @8.
A: Black zinc chromated → MY-16B-stroke, B: Nickel plated → MY-16BW-stroke
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1029
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1030
Series MY1H

With End Lock
3 2
15 16 1 10 11 5 4 8 13 12
7 14 9 6
17 18
MY1HG-F (W)
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note
1 Locking body Aluminum alloy Painted
2 Lock finger Carbon steel After quenching, nickel plated
3 Lock finger bracket Rolled steel Nickel plated
4 Lock piston Carbon tool steel After quenching, electroless nickel plated
5 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
6 Return spring Spring steel Zinc chromated
7 Bypass pipe Aluminum alloy Chromated
10 Steel ball High carbon chrome bearing steel
13 Round type R retaining ring Carbon tool steel Nickel plated
14 O-ring NBR

No. Description Material Qty. MY1H16 MY1H20 MY1H25 MY1H32 MY1H40
8 Rod seal NBR 1 DYR-4K DYR-4K DYR-8K DYR-8K DYR-8K
9 Piston seal NBR 1 DYP-12 DYP-12 DYP-20 DYP-20 DYP-20
12 O-ring NBR 1 C9 C9 C18 C18 C18
∗∗ Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
1030
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1031

Centralized Piping Type ø10 Refer to page 1056 regarding centralized piping port variations.
MY1H10G Stroke
MY1B
MY1M
30 50 4 x M3 x 0.5 depth 5 Guide center line 2 x 2 x ø3.4 through-hole
5.9 25 Bottom side M4 x 0.7 depth 7 MY1C
13.5
MY1H
45
33
8
MY1HT
22
28
Cylinder mounting center line
MY1W
8.5
Workpiece mounting center line

5 100 + Stroke
43
MY2C
2 x M5 x 0.8
1 1
3
(Port)
SMC
MY2H
2.2
SMC
1.7
27
27
20.2
19.5
MY3A
10
10
MY3B
10 10
6.8
7.3
15 15
12 8.5 55 8.5 12 MY3M
110 + Stroke
2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket (Hexagon socket
head plug) head plug)
With shock absorber + Adjusting bolt

MY1H10G Stroke H
(Shock absorber stroke) 5 40.8

20
10
2.4
5
19.5
3.5 10.5
13.7
8.2
SMC
25
D-
48
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1031
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1032
Series MY1H
MY1H16쏔/20쏔 Stroke
(LL) L 2 x 2 x øB counterbore depth C

PA 4 x MM Guide center line øLD through-hole
depth M
PD
LW
PB
QW
NW
PE
PC
PF
Workpiece mounting center line
PG Q + Stroke
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
YH
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
H
NE
NH
NC
RR
RR
PP
PP
UU TT GA P Cushion needle GA
(Port)
TT UU
2 x M5 x 0.8
G G
2 x M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) M5 x 0.8 GB (Hexagon socket head plug)
Z + Stroke
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
VV (Port)
VV 2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x 2 x J depth K
WW
WW
M5 x 0.8
XX
XX
M5 x 0.8
(Port)
MY1H쏔G MY1H쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GA GB H J K L LD LL LW M MM N NC NE NH NW
MY1H16쏔 80 6 3.5 14 9 16 40 M5 x 0.8 10 80 3.5 40 60 7 M4 x 0.7 20 14 27.8 27 37
MY1H20쏔 100 7.5 4.5 12.5 12.5 17.5 46 M6 x 1 12 100 4.5 50 78 8 M5 x 0.8 25 17.5 34 33.5 45
(mm)
Model PA PB PC PD PE PF PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV WW XX YH Z
MY1H16쏔 40 40 7.5 21 9 3.5 3.5 7.5 153 9 30 11 3 9 10.5 10 7.5 22 25 160
MY1H20쏔 50 40 14.5 27 12 4.5 4.5 11.5 191 11 36 14.5 5 10.5 12 12.5 10.5 24 31.5 200
2 x ød Y
R
S
XX
øD
Bottom ported
(Applicable O-ring)

MY1H16쏔 22 6.5 4 4 8.4 1.1
C6
MY1H20쏔 24 8 6 4 8.4 1.1
1032
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1033

MY1H25쏔/32쏔/40쏔 Stroke

Guide center line
PD
MY1B
LW
PB
QW
NW
MY1M
PE
MY1C
PC
PF
Workpiece mounting
PG center line
Q + Stroke
MY1H
P P
MY1HT
QQ
QQ
SS
SS
MY1W
H
NE
NH
NC
MY2C
RR
PP
RR
PP
G P Cushion needle G
UU TT TT UU
(Port) P GB MY2H
2xP (Hexagon socket head taper plug) 2xP
A N
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) (Hexagon socket head taper plug) MY3A
Z + Stroke MY3B
P VV P
(Hexagon socket head VV 2 x ZZ 2 x ZZ 2 x 2 x J depth K (Port) MY3M
taper plug)
WW
WW
XX
XX
P
taper plug) (Port)
MY1H쏔G MY1H쏔G
(mm)
Model A B C G GB H J K L LD LL LW M MM N NC NE NH NW P
MY1H25쏔 110 9 5.5 16 24.5 54 M6 x 1 9.5 114 5.4 53 90 9 M5 x 0.8 30 20 40.5 39 53 Rc 1/8
MY1H32쏔 140 11 6.6 19 30 68 M8 x 1.25 16 140 6.8 70 110 13 M6 x 1 37 25 50 49 64 Rc 1/8
MY1H40쏔 170 14 8.5 23 36.5 84 M10 x 1.5 15 170 8.6 85 121 13 M6 x 1 45 30.5 63 61.5 75 Rc 1/4
(mm)
Model PA PB PC PD PE PF PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV WW XX YH Z ZZ
MY1H25쏔 60 50 14.5 32 13 5.5 7 12 206 16 42 16 6 14.5 15 16 12.5 28 37.5 220 Rc 1/16
MY1H32쏔 80 60 15 42 13 6.5 8 17 264 16 51 23 4 16 16 19 16 32 47 280 Rc 1/16
MY1H40쏔 100 80 20.5 37.5 23 8 9 18.5 322 24 59 27 10.5 20 22 23 19.5 36 59.5 340 Rc 1/8
2 x ød Y
S
R
WX
øD
Bottom ported (ZZ)

(Applicable O-ring)
D-
MY1H25쏔 28 9 7 6 11.4 1.1
C9 Individual
MY1H32쏔 32 11 9.5 6 11.4 1.1 -X
MY1H40쏔 36 14 11.5 8 13.4 1.1 C11.2
Technical
(Machine the mounting side to the dimensions below.) data
1033
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1034
Series MY1H

With adjusting bolt
MY1H Bore size Stroke A
E
EA
EB
W
h
Stroke adjusting unit TT
EC FA FC
SMC
EY
Applicable bore size E EA EB EC EY FA FC h TT W

MY1H16 14.6 7 28 5.8 39.5 11.5 13 3.6 5.4 (Max. 11) 37
MY1H20 19 10 33 5.8 45.5 15 14 3.6 6 (Max. 12) 45
MY1H25 18 9 40 7.5 53.5 16 21 3.5 5 (Max. 16.5) 53
MY1H32 25 14 45.6 9.5 67.5 23 20 4.5 8 (Max. 20) 64
MY1H40 31 19 55 11 82 24.5 26 4.5 9(Max. 25) 75

MY1H Bore size Stroke L

E
EA
F
SMC
EB
W
h
Stroke adjusting unit TT MY1H16/20
Shock absorber FA FC
EC
SMC
EY
(mm)
Applicable bore size E EA EB EC EY F FA FC h S T TT W Shock absorber model
MY1H16 14.6 7 28 5.8 39.5 4 11.5 13 3.6 40.8 6 5.4 (Max. 11) 37 RB0806
MY1H20 19 10 33 5.8 45.5 4 15 14 3.6 40.8 6 6 (Max. 12) 45 RB0806
MY1H25 18 9 40 7.5 53.5 16 21 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max. 16.5) 53 RB1007
MY1H32 25 14 45.6 9.5 67.5 23 20 4.5 67.3 12 8 (Max. 20) 64 RB1412
MY1H40 31 19 55 11 82 24.5 26 4.5 67.3 12 9 (Max. 25) 75 RB1412
1034
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1035


MY1H Bore size Stroke H

E
EA
F MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
SMC
EB
W
h
MY1H
TT MY1H20
MY1HT
Shock absorber
Workpiece FA FC MY1W
MY2C
a
EC
EY
SMC
MY2H
MY3A
∗ Since dimension EY of the H type unit is greater than the table top height (dimension H),when mounting a workpiece that exceeds the overall length (dimension L) MY3B
of the slide table, allow a clearance of dimension “a” or larger on the workpiece side.
(mm)
MY3M
Applicable bore size E EA EB EC EY F FA FC h S T TT W Shock absorber model a
MY1H20 19 10 33 7.7 49.5 5 14.3 15.7 3.5 46.7 7 6 (Max. 12) 45 RB1007 4
MY1H25 18 9 40 9 57 18 17.5 4.5 67.3 12 5 (Max. 16.5) 53 RB1412 3.5
MY1H32 25 14 45.6 12.4 73 18.5 22.5 5.5 73.2 15 8 (Max. 20) 64 RB2015 5.5
MY1H40 31 19 55 12.4 86 26.5 22 5.5 73.2 15 9 (Max. 25) 75 RB2015 2.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1035
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1036
Series MY1H
Dimensions for types other than end lock are identical to the standard type
With End Lock ø16 to ø40 dimensions. For details about dimensions, etc., refer to pages 1032 to 1033.
MY1H E
(Right end)
Long hole for stroke adjustment L1
(Adjustment range : to TL mm)
W1
W2
W3
H1
H2
MY1H F MY1H W
(Left end) (Both ends)
L1 Long hole for stroke adjustment

(Adjustment range: to TL mm)
(mm)
Model H1 H2 L1 TL W1 W2 W3
MY1H16 39.2 33 0.5 5.6 18 16 10.4
MY1H20 45.7 39.5 3 6 18 16 10.4
MY1H25 53.5 46 3 11.5 29.3 27.3 17.7
MY1H32 67 56 6.5 12 29.3 27.3 17.7
MY1H40 83 68.5 10.5 16 38 35 24.4
1036
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1037

Side Support
Side support A
MY-SA
2 x øG
F
2 x øH
MY1B
E
C A
D B
MY1M
MY1C
Side support B
MY-SB MY1H
2xJ
MY1HT
MY1W
E
C A
D B MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
(mm) MY3B
Model Applicable bore size A B C D E F G H J
MY-S10AB MY1H10 53 61.6 12 21 3.6 1.8 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7 MY3M
MY-S16AB MY1H16 71 81.6 15 26 4.9 3 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7
MY-S20AB MY1H20 91 103.6 25 38 6.4 4 8 4.5 M5 x 0.8
MY-S25AB MY1H25 105 119 35 50 8 5 9.5 5.5 M6 x 1
MY-S32AB MY1H32 130 148 45 64 11.7 6 11 6.6 M8 x 1.25
MY-S40AB MY1H40 145 167 55 80 14.8 8.5 14 9 M10 x 1.5
For long stroke operation, the cylinder W kg (800)

own weight and the load weight. In such
section. The spacing (l) of the support l
must be no more than the values shown (600)
40
in the graph on the right.
Caution W
m
l 30
M
Mass
MYY11H
1. If the cylinder mounting surfaces are (550)

W
H4400

MY
Therefore, be sure to level the cylinder

1H3
tube when mounting. Also, for long 20

l l (500)
2

MY

1H

25
MY 1H
(450)
10
1H 16
MY
shown in the graph.

20
2. Support brackets are not for mounting; (100)

M
use them solely for providing support. Y1
H1
0
D-
0
500 1000 1500 -X
mm
Support spacing l
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1037
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1039
Series MY1
High Rigidity/Linear Guide Type
HT MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
ø50, ø63
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
The use of two linear guides
allows a maximum load of 320
kg. (ø63)
Rodless cylinder
MY1BH
SMC
2 linear guides
Easy maintenance is stressed by a

revolutionary construction which
allows cylinder replacement without
disturbing the guide units or
workpiece.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1039
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1040
Series MY1HT Prior to Use


Model Select the moment from within the range
(mm) M1 M2 M3 m1 m2 m3
50 140 180 140 200 140 200 of operating limits shown in the graphs.
MY1HT Note that the maximum allowable load
63 240 300 240 320 220 320
value may sometimes be exceeded even
The above values are the maximum allowable values for moment and load. Refer to each graph regarding
within the operating limits shown in the
the maximum allowable moment and maximum allowable load for a particular piston speed.
graphs. Therefore, also check the
allowable load for the selected conditions.
Load mass (kg)

W1
W2 W3
Moment (N·m)
F1 M1=F1 x L1 F2 M 2 = F2 x L2 F3 M3=F3 x L3
L2
L1
L3

Mmax for (2) and (3) from the maximum allowable moment graph (M1, M2, M3). Maximum Load Mass

Sum of guide Load weight [m] Static moment [M] (1) Dynamic moment [ME] (2) Select the load from within the range of
load factors ≤ 1 limits shown in the graphs. Note that the
Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax]
maximum allowable moment value may
Note 1) Moment caused by the load, etc., with cylinder in resting condition. sometimes be exceeded even within the
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the workpiece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum
operating limits shown in the graphs.
of the load factors (∑α) is the total of all such moments. Therefore, also check the allowable
Use the following formulae to calculate dynamic moment when taking stopper impact
into consideration.
υa: Average speed (mm/s) δ: Damper coefficient
(MY1B10, MY1H10)
υ = 1.4υa (mm/s) FE = 1.4υa·δ·m·g
Note 4)
Note 5)
With air cushion = 1/100 υ
∴ME = 3 ·FE·L1 = 4.57υaδmL1
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) m FE
L1
Note 4) 1.4υaδ is a dimensionless coefficient for calculating impact force. ME

of stopper impact according to service life calculations.
1040
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1041

High Rigidity/Linear Guide Type Series MY1HT
MY1HT/M1 MY1HT/M2 MY1HT/M3

1000 1000 1000
500 500 500

MY1B
MY1M
300 300 300
MY1C
MY1HT63
MY1H
N·m
N·m
N·m
MY1HT63 MY1HT63
MY1HT
Moment
Moment
Moment
100 100 100
MY1HT50 MY1HT50 MY1HT50
MY1W
50 50 50 MY2C
40 40 40
30 30 30 MY2H
MY3A
20 20 20 MY3B
MY3M
10 10 10
100 200 300 400 500 1000 100 200 300 400 500 1000 100 200 300 400 500 1000
MY1HT/m1 MY1HT/m2 MY1HT/m3

1000 1000 1000
500 500 500
300 300 300
MY1HT63 MY1HT63
kg
kg
kg
MY1HT63
Load mass
Load mass
Load mass
100 100 100
MY1HT50 MY1HT50
50 50 50
MY1HT50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
D-
-X
10 10 10
100 200 300 400 500 1000 100 200 300 400 500 1000 100 200 300 400 500 1000 Individual
-X
Technical
data
1041
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1042
Series MY1HT
Model Selection
Following are the steps for selecting the most suitable Series MY1HT to your application.
Cylinder ································· MY1HT50-600
z
Average operating speed υa ··· 700 mm/s y
1. Horizontal 2. Wall
mounting mounting
Mounting orientation ················ Vertical mounting MY1HT50-600 P. 978 P. 948
Cusion····································· Shock absorber x
y z
(δ = 1/100) x
Wd: Workpiece (500 g)
3. Ceiling x
Wc: MHL2-16D1 (795 g) mounting 4. Vertical
P. 998 mounting
Wa: Connection plate t = 10 (880 g)
y z y
x
z
Wb: MGGLB25-200 (4.35 kg)
2. Load Blocking
Y Mass and Center of Gravity
for Each Workpiece
5
111
42.5
210 Center of gravity

Z Workpiece no. Mass
Xn Yn Zn
Wa 0.88 kg 65 mm 0 mm 5 mm
65
Y Wb 4.35 kg 150 mm 0 mm 42.5 mm

150
Wc 0.795 kg 150 mm 111 mm 42.5 mm

Wd 0.5 kg 150 mm 210 mm 42.5 mm
X
n=a, b, c, d
m4 = ∑mn
= 0.88 + 4.35 + 0.795 + 0.5 = 6.525 kg
1
X = x ∑ (mn x xn)
m4
1
= (0.88 x 65 + 4.35 x 150 + 0.795 x 150 + 0.5 x 150) = 138.5 mm
6.525
1
Y = x ∑ (mn x yn)
m4
1
= (0.88 x 0 + 4.35 x 0 + 0.795 x 111 + 0.5 x 210) = 29.6 mm
6.525
1
Z = x ∑ (mn x zn)
m4
1
= (0.88 x 5 + 4.35 x 42.5 + 0.795 x 42.5 + 0.5 x 42.5) = 37.4 mm
6.525

m4 : Mass
m4 is the mass which can be transferred by the thrust, and as a rule, is actually ·········
about 0.3 to 0.7 of the thrust. (This differs depending on the operating speed.)
M1: Moment m4
M1
M1 max (from (1) of graph MY1HT/M1) = 60 (N·m) ···················································································
M1 = m4 x g x Z = 6.525 x 9.8 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 2.39 (N·m)
m4
Z
1042
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1043

M3 : Moment
M3 max (from (2) of graph MY1HT/M3) = 60 (N·m) ·············································································· MY1B
M3 = m4 x g x Y = 6.525 x 9.8 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 1.89 (N·m) Y
MY1M
M3 m4 MY1C
5. Calculation of Load Factor for Dynamic Moment MY1H
Equivalent load FE at impact MY1HT
FE = 1.4υa x δ x m x g = 1.4 x 700 x
1 M1
x 6.525 x 9.8 = 626.7 (N)
100 MY1W
M1E : Moment
M1E max (from (3) of graph MY1HT/M1 where 1.4υa = 980 mm/s) = 42.9 (N·m) ······················· MY2C
1 1 FE
M1E =
3
x FE x Z =
3
x 626.7 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 7.82 (N·m) M1E MY2H
Load factor α3 = M1E/M1E max = 7.82/42.9 = 0.18 MY3A
MY3B
M3E : Moment
MY3M
M3E max (from (4) of graph MY1HT/M3 where 1.4υa = 980 mm/s) = 42.9 (N·m)····························· Y
1 1
M3E = x FE x Y = x 626.7 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 6.19 (N·m)
3 3
FE
M3 M3E
∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 = 0.39 ≤ 1
In an actual calculation, when the total sum of guide load factors ∑α in the formula above is more than 1, consider
either decreasing the speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series.
Allowable Moment
MY1HT/M1 MY1HT/M3
1000 1000
500 500
300 300
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
MY1HT63 MY1HT63
100 100
MY1HT50 MY1HT50
(1) (2)
50
(3) 50
(4)
40 40
30 30 D-
20 20
-X
10 10
Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 100 200 300 400 500 1000 -X
Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Technical
data
1043
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1044

High Rigidity/Linear Guide Type
Series
ø50, ø63
MY1HT
How to Order
High Rigidity/
Linear Guide Type MY1HT 50 400 L Y7BW
Made to Order
High rigidity/Linear guide type Refer to page 1045
(2 linear guides) for details.
Bore size Number of

50 50 mm auto switches
63 63 mm
Nil 2 pcs.
S 1 pc.
Port thread type n “n” pcs.
Symbol Type Bore size
Nil Rc
TN NPT ø50, ø63
TF G
Auto switch
Piping Nil Without auto switch(Built-in magnet)
Nil Standard type ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
refer to the table below.
G Centralized piping type
Option
Stroke Adjusting Unit Part No. Stroke adjusting unit
Bore size L One shock absorber at each stroke end
(mm)
50 63
H Two shock absorbers at each stroke end
Unit type MYT-A50L MYT-A63L LH One shock absorber at one end, two shock absorbers at one end
Side Support Part No. Stroke

Bore size
(mm) 50 63 Refer to “Standard Stroke”
Type
on page 1045.
Side support A MY-S63A
Side support B MY-S63B
Indicator
Electrical Wiring Pre-wired

light
Type Special function entry 0.5 3 5 connector Applicable load

(Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line
(Nil) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) Y69A Y59A
Solid state switch
5V, 12 V IC circuit
— 3-wire (PNP) Y7PV Y7P
2-wire 12 V Y69B Y59B — Relay,
Grommet Yes 24V —
3-wire (NPN) Y7NWV Y7NW PLC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) Y7PWV Y7PW
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12 V Y7BWV Y7BW —
Reed switch
3-wire
— 5V — — Z76 — — IC circuit —
Yes (NPN equivalent)
— Grommet
2-wire
100 V — Z73 — — Relay,
24 V 12 V
No 100Vor less — Z80 — — IC circuit PLC
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m····Nil (Example) Y7BW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon
3 m·····L (Example) Y7BWL receipt of order.
5 m·····Z (Example) Y7BWZ ∗ Separate switch spacers (BMP1-032) are required for
retrofitting of auto switches.
1044
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:20 PM Page 1045

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 50 63

Fluid Air
MY1B
Piston speed 100 to 1000 mm/s
Cushion Shock absorbers on both ends (Standard) MY1M
Lubrication Non-lube
JIS Symbol MY1C
Stroke length tolerance 2700 or less +1.8 +2.8
0 , 2701 to 5000 0
Port size Side port Rc 3/8 MY1H

Note) Use at a speed within the absorption capacity range. Refer to page 1046.
MY1HT
Stroke Adjusting Unit Specifications MY1W

MY2C
Applicable bore size (mm) 50 63
L H L H MY2H
Unit symbol, contents RB2015 and RB2015 and RB2725 and RB2725 and MY3A
adjusting bolt: 1 set each adjusting bolt: 2 sets each adjusting bolt: 1 set each adjusting bolt: 2 sets each MY3B
Fine stroke adjustment range (mm) 0 to –20 0 to –25
Stroke adjustment range For adjustment method, refer to page 1047.
MY3M
Shock absorber model RB2015 x 1 pc. RB2015 x 2 pcs. RB2725 x 1 pc. RB2725 x 2 pcs.
Note)
Maximum energy absorption (J) 58.8 88.2 147 220.5 Note)
Stroke absorption (mm) 15 15 25 25
Maximum collision speed (mm/s) 1000 1000
Maximum operating frequency (cycle/min) 25 25 10 10
Extended 8.34 16.68 8.83 17.66
Spring force (N)
Retracted 20.50 41.00 20.01 40.02
Operating temperature range (°C) 5 to 60
Note) Maximum energy absorption for 2 pcs. is calculated by multiplying the value for 1 pc. by 1.5.
∗ The shock absorber service life is different from that of the MY1HT cylinder depending on operating conditions.
Refer to the RB Series Specific Product Precautions for the replacement period.
Theoretical Output Standard Stroke

(N)
Bore Piston Operating pressure (MPa) Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Note) Maximum manufacturable stroke (mm)
size area
(mm) (mm ) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
2 50 . 63 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1500, 2000 5000
50 1962 392 588 784 981 1177 1373 1569 Note) Cylinders other than the standard stroke type are manufactured upon request
for special order.
63 3115 623 934 1246 1557 1869 2180 2492
Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston
area (mm2)
Mass
(kg)
Made to Order Specifications Side support
(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1498 and 1553.) Additional mass Stroke adjusting unit mass
Bore size Basic mass (per set)
per each 25 mm
Symbol Specifications (mm) mass Type L unit H unit
of stroke LH unit
—XC67 NBR rubber lining in dust seal band A and B mass mass mass
50 30.62 0.87 0.17 0.62 0.93 1.24 D-
63 41.69 1.13 0.17 1.08 1.62 2.16
Calculation: (Example) MY1HT50-400L
-X
• Basic mass ·············30.62 kg • Cylinder stroke········· 400 st
Individual
• Additional mass ····0.87/25 st 30.62 + 0.87 x 400 ÷ 25 + 0.62 x 2 ≅ 45.8
-X
• L unit mass ···············0.62 kg
Technical
data
1045
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1046
Series MY1HT
Cushion Capacity
Cushion Selection Stroke Adjusting Unit Absorption Capacity Stopper Bolt Holding Screw Tightening Torque
Stopper Bolt
<Stroke adjusting unit with built-in shock MY1HT50 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting
absorber>
L unit 2000 Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts (N·m)
mm/s
1500
Use this unit when the cylinder stroke is Hu Bore size (mm) Tightening torque
1000 ni
outside of the effective air cushion range Lu t 50 0.6
Collision speed
nit
even if the load and speed are within the 500 63 1.5
air cushion limit line, or when the cylinder 400
is operated in a load and speed range
300 Calculation of Absorbed Energy for
200
above the air cushion limit line or below Stroke Adjusting Unit with
the L unit limit line. 100 Built-in Shock Absorber (N·m)
H unit 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 500
Horizontal collision Vertical Vertical
(Downward) (Upward)
Use this unit when the cylinder is operated Load mass kg
in a load and speed range above the L unit m
s υ m
limit line and below the H unit limit line. MY1HT63 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa s
Type of υ
impact s
2000
mm/s
1500
1000 L unit υ m
Collision speed
m·υ2
1
500 Kinetic energy E1
400 2
300 Thrust energy E2 F·s F·s + m·g·s F·s – m·g·s
200
Absorbed energy E E1 + E2
100 Symbol
10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 500 1000 υ: Speed of impact object (m/s)
Load mass kg F: Cylinder thrust (N)
s: Shock absorber stroke (m)
m: Mass of impact object (kg)
Note) The speed of the impact object is measured
at the time of impact with the shock absorber.
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Mounting
Caution
1. Do not put hands or fingers inside when the body is
suspended.
Since the body is heavy, use eye bolts when suspending it.
(The eye bolts are not included with the body.)
1046
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1047

Stroke Adjustment Method
Caution Stopper bolt

A B
1. As shown in Figure (1), to adjust the stopper bolt within (Stopper bolt side) (Shock absorber side)
the adjustment range A, insert a hexagon wrench from Hexagon wrench Shock absorber
the top to loosen the hexagon socket head set screw Hexagon nut
Torque Absorber ring
by approximately one turn, and then adjust the stopper
Adjuster holder
bolt with a flat head screwdriver. MY1B
2. When the adjustment described in 1 above is
insufficient, the shock absorber can be adjusted.
Remove the covers as shown in Figure (2) and make M16 x 2 MY1M
further adjustment by loosening the hexagon nut. C (Stopper bolt overall length) 10 (Ring width)
3. Various dimensions are indicated in Table (1). Never MY1C
make an adjustment that exceeds the dimensions in the
table, as it may cause an accident and/or damage. Flat head screwdriver
MY1H
Top cover Upp Figure (1) Stroke adjusting section detail
er p
Table (1) (mm)

Hexagon socket head cap screw late
ass
'y AMax. BMax. MY1HT
Bore size (mm) 50 63
A to A Max. 6 to 26 6 to 31 MY1W
B to B Max. 14 to 54 14 to 74
C 87 102 MY2C
Max. adjustment range 60 85
Side cover
MY2H
Hexagon socket head cap screw MY3A
Figure (2) Cover installation and removal Figure (3) Maximum stroke adjustment detail MY3B
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure MY3M
Caution Hexagon socket head cap screw 1 Top cover
(Tightening torque 25 N·m) Holding block
Disassembly step Upper plate
1. Remove the hexagon socket head cap screws 1, and Hexagon socket head
remove the upper plates. cap screw 4
(ø50: Tightening torque 5 N·m
2. Remove the top cover. Coupler ø63: Tightening torque 11 N·m)
3. Remove the hexagon socket head cap screws 2, and
End cover
remove the end covers and couplers.
Hexagon socket
4. Remove the hexagon socket head cap screws 3. head cap screw 2
5. Remove the hexagon socket head cap screws 4, and (Tightening torque 25 N·m)
remove the end supports.
6. Remove the cylinder.
Cylinder ∗
for driving R
(MY1BH)
End support
Assembly step L
Hexagon socket head cap screw 3
1. Insert the MY1BH cylinder. End plate
(Tightening torque 3 N·m)
2. Temporarily fasten the end supports with the hexagon socket head cap screws 4.
3. With two hexagon socket head cap screws 3 on the L or R side, pull the end support and the cylinder.
4. Tighten the hexagon socket head cap screws 3 on the other side to eliminate the looseness in the axial direction.
(At this point, a space is created between the end support and the end plate on one side, but this is not a problem.)
5. Re-tighten the hexagon socket head cap screws 4.
6. Fasten the end cover with the hexagon head cap screws 2, while making sure that the coupler is in the right direction.
7. Place the top cover on the body.
8. Insert the holding blocks into the top cover and fasten the upper plates with the hexagon socket head cap screws 1.
∗ Cylinder For Driving (Series MY1BH)

Since Series MY1BH is a cylinder for driving for Series MY1HT, its construction is different from Series MY1B.
Do not use Series MY1B as a cylinder for driving, since it will lead to damage.
How to Order High rigidity/Linear guide type MY1HT 50 300 L Z73

D-
Cylinder for driving MY1BH 50 300
Bore size Stroke (mm) -X
50 50 mm
Port thread type Piping
Symbol Type Bore size Individual
63 63 mm Nil Standard type
Nil Rc -X
G Centralized piping type
TN NPT ø50, ø63 Technical
TF G data
1047
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1048
Series MY1HT
Construction
Standard type
10 20 9 8 15
Note) With top cover removed
6 5 19 4 16 2 3 13 18 14 12 17
Note) With top cover removed

7 1 11
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note
1 Guide frame Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
2 Slide table Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
3 Side cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
4 Top cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
5 Upper plate Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
6 End plate Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
7 Bottom plate Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
8 End cover Aluminum alloy Chromated
9 Coupler Aluminum alloy Chromated
10 Adjuster holder Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
11 Guide —
12 Shock absorber —
13 Stopper bolt Carbon steel Nickel plated
14 Absorber ring Rolled steel Nickel plated
15 End support Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
16 Top block Aluminum alloy Chromated
17 Side block Aluminum alloy Chromated
18 Slide plate Special resin
19 Rodless cylinder — MY1BH
20 Stopper Carbon steel Nickel plated
1048
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1049

MY1HT50쏔/63쏔 Stroke
(LL) L 2 x M12 x 1.75 depth 30 MY1B

(To attach eyebolt)
11
PA PA
PE PE S x M12 x 1.75 depth 30 MY1M
5
13
MY1C
20
MY1H
NW
YW
PB Applicable nut JIS B 1163
Square nut M12 MY1HT
Dimensions of T-slot for mounting
MY1W
PG QE + Stroke
43 MY2C
Rc 3/8
Rc 3/8 Stopper bolt adjusting unit (Hexagon socket head taper plug) MY2H
(Hexagon socket
(YH)
Cylinder for driving

head taper plug) (MY1BH쏔-쏔) MY3A
MY3B
SS
MY3M
SS
NH
H
EY
RR
RR
HL
UU (TT) A N Rc 3/8
Rc 3/8 Z + Stroke T-slot section (Port)
(Port) for mounting (TT) UU
PL
Rc 3/8 Rc 3/8
(Hexagon socket (Port)
head taper plug)
Rc 3/8 Rc 3/8
MY1HT쏔G MY1HT쏔G
(mm)
Model A EY H HL L LL N NH NW PA PB PE PG
MY1HT50쏔 207 97.5 145 23 210 102 30 143 254 90 200 - 15
MY1HT63쏔 237 104.5 170 26 240 117 35 168 274 100 220 50 17.5
(mm)
Model PL QE RR S SS TT UU YH YW Z
MY1HT50쏔 180 384 57 6 10 103.5 23.5 136.4 253 414
MY1HT63쏔 200 439 71.5 10 13.5 108 29 162.6 273 474
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1049
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1050
Series MY1HT
Side Support
Side support A
MY-S63A
2 x ø17.5
10.5
18.3
2 x ø11.5
70 A
100 B
Side support B
MY-S63B
2 x M12 x 1.75
18.3
70 A
100 B
Dimensions (mm)
Model Applicable bore size A B
MY1HT50 284 314
MY-S63 AB
MY1HT63 304 334
∗ A set of side supports consists of a left support
and a right support.
For long stroke operation, the cylinder W kg

own weight and the load weight. In such
section. The spacing (l) of the support l
in the graph on the right.
m
(450)
W
Caution
Mass
l 300
W
1. If the cylinder mounting surfaces are
support may cause poor operation. (400)
Therefore, be sure to level the cylinder 200
l l
tube when mounting. Also, for long
MY1

MY1
HT6

HT5
recommended even if the spacing 100

0

shown in the graph.
2. Support brackets are not for mounting;
0
500 1000 1500
mm
Support spacing l
1050
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1051
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end)

MY1B (Basic type)
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (mm)
ø10, ø16, ø20 Auto switch D-Y59쏔/Y7P
model D-M9쏔
D-Y69쏔/Y7PV
D-M9쏔V D-A9쏔
D-Y7쏔W
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔V
D-Y7쏔WV
D-M9쏔WV
D-Z7쏔/Z80
Bore size A B A B A B
A B 10 24 86 20 90 — — MY1B
16 31.5 128.5 27.5 132.5 — —
20 39 161 35 165 — — MY1M
ø25 to ø100 25 136.5 83.5 — — 131.5 88.5
32 185 95 — — 180 100 MY1C
40 — — — — 216 124
50 277.5 122.5 — — 272.5 127.5 MY1H
63 322.5 137.5 — — 317.5 142.5
80 489.5 200.5 — — 484.5 205.5 MY1HT
A B 100 574.5 225.5 — — 569.5 230.5
Note 1) D-M9쏔쏔쏔type cannot be mounted on ø40.
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
MY1W
MY2C
MY1M (Slide bearing guide type)
MY2H
ø16, ø20 Auto switch
D-Y59쏔/Y7P
model D-M9쏔 MY3A
D-Y69쏔Y7PV
D-M9쏔V D-A9쏔 MY3B
D-Y7쏔W
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔V
D-Y7쏔WV
D-M9쏔WV
D-Z7쏔/Z80 MY3M
16 74 86 70 90 — —
A B
20 94 106 90 110 — —
25 — — — — 139.5 80.5
ø25 to ø63 32 189.5 90.5 — — 184.5 95.5
40 — — — — 229.5 110.5
50 283.5 116.5 — — 278.5 121.5
63 328.5 131.5 — — 323.5 136.5
Note 1) D-M9쏔쏔쏔type cannot be mounted on ø25 and ø40.
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
A B
MY1C (Cam follower guide type)

ø16, ø20 Auto switch D-Y59쏔/Y7P
model D-M9쏔
D-Y69쏔/Y7PV
D-M9쏔V D-A9쏔
D-Y7쏔W
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔V
D-Y7쏔WV
D-M9쏔WV
D-Z7쏔/Z80
16 74 86 70 90 — —
A B
20 94 106 90 110 — —
25 102 118 — — 97 123
ø25 to ø63 32 132 148 — — 127 153
40 — — — — 157.5 182.5
50 283.5 116.5 — — 278.5 121.5
63 328.5 131.5 — — 323.5 136.5
Note 1) D-M9쏔쏔쏔type cannot be mounted on ø40.
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting. D-
A B
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1051
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1052
Series MY1

MY1H (Linear guide type)
ø10, ø16, ø20 Auto switch D-Y59쏔/Y7P
model D-M9쏔
D-Y69쏔/Y7PV
D-M9쏔V D-A9쏔
D-Y7쏔W
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔V
D-Y7쏔WV
D-M9쏔WV
D-Z7쏔/Z80
A B 10 24 86 20 90 — —
16 31.5 128.5 27.5 132.5 — —
20 39 161 35 165 — —
ø25 to ø40
25 136.5 83.5 132.5 87.5 131.5 88.5
32 185 94 181 99 180 100
40 231 119 217 123 216 124
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
A B
MY1HT (High rigidity/Linear guide type)

Proper Auto Switch
ø50, ø63 Mounting Position (mm)
Auto switch
D-Y59쏔/Y7P
model
D-Y69쏔/Y7PV
D-Y7쏔W
D-Y7쏔WV
D-Z7쏔/Z80
Bore size A B
50 290.5 333.5
A B
63 123.5 138.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after
confirming the operating condition
in the actual setting.
1052
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1053

Note) Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)
Operating Range There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
MY1B (Basic type) (mm) MY1H (Linear guide type) (mm)

Bore size Bore size
Auto switch model Auto switch model
10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 10 16 20 25 32 40
D-A9/A9V 6 6.5 8.5 — — — — — — — D-A9/A9V 11 6.5 8.5 — — —
D-M9/M9V —
D-M9/M9V
3.5 4 5.5 5.5 7 11.5 12 12 11.5 3 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5
D-M9W/M9WV D-M9W/M9WV
D-Z7/Z80 — — — 8.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 D-Z7/Z80 — — — 8.5 11.5 11.5
D-Y59/Y69l D-Y59/Y69 MY1B

D-Y7P/Y7PV — — — 6 9 10 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 D-Y7P/Y7PV — — — 6 9 10
D-Y7W/Y7WV D-Y7W/Y7WV
MY1M
D-M9type cannot be mounted on ø40.
MY1C
MY1M (Slide bearing guide type) (mm) MY1HT
Bore size (High rigidity/Linear guide type) (mm) MY1H
Auto switch model
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Bore size
D-A9/A9V 11 7.5 — — — — —
Auto switch model
50 63 MY1HT
D-M9/M9V — —
D-Z7/Z80 11 11
7.5 7.5 8.5 7 6
D-M9W/M9WV D-Y59/Y69 MY1W
D-Z7/Z80 — — 12 12 12 11.5 11.5 D-Y7P/Y7PV 5 5
D-Y59/Y69 D-Y7W/Y7WV MY2C
D-Y7P/Y7PV — — 5 5 5 5.5 5.5
D-Y7W/Y7WV MY2H
D-M9type cannot be mounted on ø25 and ø40.
MY3A
MY3B
MY1C (Cam follower guide type) (mm)
Bore size
MY3M
Auto switch model
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
D-A9/A9V 11 7.5 — — — — —
D-M9/M9V —
7.5 7.5 7 8 7 6
D-M9W/M9WV
D-Z7/Z80 — — 12 12 12 11.5 11.5
D-Y59/Y69l
D-Y7P/Y7PV — — 5 5 5 5.5 5.5
D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-M9type cannot be mounted on ø40.
Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.

ø25 to ø63: M9(V)/M9W(V)
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model BMG2-012
ø10, ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø63
D-A9/A9V
D-M9/M9V — BMG2-012
D-M9W/M9WV
Note1) D-A9type cannot be mounted on ø25 to ø100 of Series MY1. D-M9
type cannot be mounted on ø25 and ø40 of Series MY1M, and ø40 of Series
MY1B and MY1C.
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type Part no. Electrical entry (Fetching direction) Features Applicable bore size
D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV —
Grommet (Perpendicular)
D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
Solid state
D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P —
ø25 to ø100 D-
Grommet (In-line)
D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
∗ For solid state auto switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
-X
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to pages 1290 and 1292 for details.
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1053
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1054
Series MY1
Selection Mounting
Caution Caution
1. When using a cylinder with long strokes, implement 2. When connecting to a load which has an external
an intermediate support. guide mechanism, use a discrepancy absorption
When using a cylinder with long strokes, implement an mechanism.
intermediate support to prevent the tube from sagging and • Mechanically jointed rodless cylinders can be used with a
being deflected by vibration or an external load. direct load within the allowable range for each type of guide.
Refer to the Guide for Side Support Application on pages 971, Please note that careful alignment is necessary when
993, 1013, 1037 and 1050. connecting to a load having an external guide mechanism.
Mount the external guide mounting brackets and floating
2. For intermediate stops, use a dual-side pressure
brackets in a place where the required degree of freedom for
control circuit.
the floating Y and Z axes can be secured.
Since the mechanically jointed rodless cylinders have a
The thrust transmission area of the floating bracket must be
unique seal structure, slight external leakage may occur.
fixed so that it does not partially contact the body.
Controlling intermediate stops with a 3 position valve cannot
∗ Refer to the Coordinates and Moment in Model Selection on
hold the stopping position of the slide table (slider). The
page 947 for the details of floating Y and Z axes.
speed at the restarting state also may not be controllable. Use
the dual-side pressure control circuit with a PAB-connected 3 3. Do not mount cylinders as they are twisted.
position valve for intermediate stops. When mounting, be sure for a cylinder tube not to be twisted.
The flatness of the mounting surface is not appropriate, the
3. Constant speed.
cylinder tube is twisted, which may cause air leakage due to
Since the mechanically jointed rodless cylinders have a
the detachment of a seal belt, damage a dust seal band, and
unique seal structure, a slight speed change may occur. For
cause malfunctions.
applications that require constant speed, select an applicable
equipment for the level of demand. 4. Do not mount a slide table on the fixed equipment
4. Load factor of 0.5 or less surface.
It may cause damage or malfunctions since an excessive load
When the load factor is high against the cylinder output, it
is applied to the bearing.
may adversely affect the cylinder (condensation, etc.) and
cause malfunctions. Select a cylinder to make the load factor
Head cover Cylinder tube
less than 0.5. (Mainly when using an external guide)
5. Cautions on less frequent operation
When the cylinder is used extremely infrequently, operation
may be interrupted in order for anchoring and a change
lubrication to be performed or service life may be reduced.
6. Consider uncalculated loads such as piping, Slide table
cableveyor, etc., when selecting a load moment Mounting with a slide table (slider)
Calculation does not include the external acting force of
piping, cableveyor, etc. Select load factors taking into account 5. Consult SMC when mounting in a cantilevered way.
the external acting force of piping, cableveyor, etc. Since the cylinder body deflects, it may cause malfunctions.
7. Accuracy Please consult SMC when using it this way.
The mechanical jointed rodless cylinder does not guarantee
traveling parallelism. When accuracy in traveling parallelism Head cover Slide table
and a middle position of stroke is required, please consult
SMC.
Cylinder tube
Mounting in a cantilevered way
Mounting 6. Fixed parts of the cylinder on both ends must have

at least 5 mm of contact between where the bottom
Caution of the cylinder tube and the equipment surface.
Head cover Slide table
1. Do not apply strong impacts or excessive moment
to the slide table (slider).
• The slide table (slider) is supported by precision bearings
(MY1C, MY1H) or resin bearings. Therefore, do not apply
strong impacts or excessive moment, etc., when mounting Cylinder tube
workpieces. 5 mm or more 5 mm or more
1054
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1055
Series MY1
Mounting Operating Environment
Caution Warning
7. Do not generate negative pressure in the cylinder 1. Do not use in an environment where the cylinder is
tube. exposed to coolant, cutting oil, water drops, adhe-
MY1B
Take precautions under operating conditions in which sive foreign parti-cles, dust, etc. and avoid use with
negative pressure is generated inside the cylinder by external compressed air containing drainage and foreign
MY1M
forces or inertial forces. Air leakage may occur due to particles.
separation of the seal belt. Do not generate negative pressure
,
• Foreign matter or liquids on the cylinder s interior or
MY1C
in the cylinder by forcibly moving it with an external force exterior can wash out the lubricating grease, which can lead
during the trial operation or dropping it with self-weight under to deterioration and damage of dust seal band and seal MY1H
the non-pressure state, etc. When the negative pressure is materials, causing a danger of malfunction.
generated, slowly move the cylinder by hand and move the When operating in locations with exposure to water and oil, MY1HT
stroke back and forth. After doing so, if air leakage still or in dusty locations, provide protection such as a cover to
occurs, please consult SMC. prevent direct contact with the cylinder, or mount so that the MY1W
dust seal band surface faces downward, and operate with
clean compressed air. MY2C
Handling
2. Carry out cleaning and grease application suitable MY2H
Caution for the operating environment.
Carry out cleaning regularly when using in an operating MY3A
1. Do not unnecessarily alter the guide adjustment environment in which the product is likely to get dirty. MY3B
setting. After cleaning, be sure to apply grease to the top side of the
• The adjustment of the guide is preset and does not require cylinder tube and the rotating part of the dust seal band.
MY3M
readjustment under normal operating conditions. Therefore, Apply grease to these parts regularly even if not after
do not unnecessarily alter the guide adjustment setting. cleaning. Please consult SMC for the cleaning of the slide
However, series other than the MY1H Series can be table (slider) interior and grease application.
readjusted and their bearings can be replaced.
To perform these operations, refer to the bearing
replacement procedure given in the instruction manual. Service Life and Replacement Period of Shock Absorber
2. Do not get your hands caught during cylinder
operation. Caution
For the cylinder with a stroke adjusting unit, the space
between the slide table and stroke adjusting unit is very small, 1. Allowable operating cycle under the specifications
and your hands may get caught. When operating without a set in this catalog is shown below.
protective cover, be careful not to get your hands caught. 1.2 million times RB08
3. Avoid operation that causes negative pressure 2 million times RB10 to RB2725
inside the cylinder. Note) Specified service life (suitable replacement period) is the value at
Take precautions under operating conditions in which room temperature (20 to 25°C). The period may vary depending on
negative pressure is increased inside the cylinder by external the temperature and other conditions. In some cases the absorber
forces or inertial forces. Air leakage may occur due to may need to be replaced before the allowable operating cycle
separation of the seal belt. above.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1055
P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:21 PM Page 1056
Series MY1
Caution
Centralized Piping Port Variations
• Head cover piping connection can be freely selected to best suit different piping conditions.
Applicable bore size Port variations
MY1B10
MY1H10 L R
L L
R R
Note 1) R R L L Note 1)
R L
L R
L R
L R
Note 1) These ports are not applicable to MY1H10. Slide table operating direction
MY1B16 to 100
MY1M16 to 63
MY1C16 to 63
MY1H16 to 40 L L L L
L L
R R R R R R
L R R L
Note 2) R R Note 2)
L L
O-ring
L R
Slide table operating direction

Piping tube
Note 2) For bottom piping, refer to the figure above.
MY1HT50/63
R L
L R
L L
R R
L R
1056
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1057
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder with Protective Cover

Series MY1쏔W
16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
MY1B
Protective cover offers excellent dust
MY1M
and water resistance
MY1C
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Bore size (mm)

Series Guide type Cover Option
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
MY1MW

D-

MY1MWK
-X
MY1CW

Individual
-X

MY1CWK Technical

data
!
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1058
Series MY1W
Slide table
Slide plate
Cover
Side seal assembly∗ Slide plate∗
Belt clamp
Port cover
Spacer ∗
Spacer
Seal guide∗
End plate
Base cylinder
Items marked with an “∗” are for Series MY1WK (with side seal) only.
Dustproof and water resistant features are improved
1 for using in locations where the cylinder is exposed

to powder dust and water drop or splash.
2 Side seals provide greater lateral dustproof

and water resistance.
3 The cover in no way interferes with the

installation of base cylinder option.
4 Cover units and side seal units can be installed on the

already existing Series MY1M/MY1C.
Protective cover only
5 minimally adds to overall

length.
Base cylinder
6
Base cylinder + 20 to 30 mm
Water-resistant solid state switches can be mounted.
1058
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1059
Series MY1쏔W
Model Selection 1
(
!

! !

!

!

)*)+3)*+ !

Standards for Tentative Model Selection

!

M2 :
Rolling
MY1MW

!!! $ %
M1: Pitching
"#
MY1CW

"# !!! $ %& MY1B
'
# (

!!!

!

!

! !
)

!!! )*+
,
MY1M
'
# -.!!!/

!

" 0

#
&1

!
"

!

#
MY1C
M3: Yawing MY1H
MY1HT
Selection Flow Chart MY1W
Operating Conditions MY2C
m: 2 "0 # )
:

!
V:
"3# .!!! MY2H

P: 4

")#
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Tentative Selection of Cylinder Model
MY1MW:

MY1CW:

!

!
Load mass NG

!
!
9

m 5 mmax

OK
Determination of NG

!
!
9

allowable moment
67a8 5 1

!
!
9

OK
Examination of cushioning
mechanism at stroke end
NG Type L NG External NG
Air cushion stroke adjusting unit cushioning unit*
OK OK OK
Examination of port variations and
auto switch mounting (type)

!
9

D-
* ;
$
! <

!
!

!

!
<

!

Model selected (

!

!

!

!! =
-X

!
:

!

>
,
<

! ! ) Individual
-X
Technical
data
&?
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1060
Series MY1W
Types of Moment Applied to Rodless Cylinders
Multiple moments may be generated depending on the mounting orientation, load, and position of the center of gravity.
z
Coordinates and Moments
M3: Yawing
M1: Pitching
y
x M2: Rolling
Static Moment
Horizontal mounting Ceiling mounting Wall mounting
M1
M2
M3
M1 M2
y M2
Y X
x z
m1 x g Y y x Z X
x X
m2 x g m3 x g
Vertical mounting
M3
Static load (m) m1 m2 m3 m4 Note)
M1
Static moment
M1 m1 x g x X m2 x g x X —— m4 x g x Z
z
Y Z y M2 m1 x g x Y m2 x g x Y m3 x g x Z ——
m4 x g M3 —— —— m3 x g x X m4 x g x Y
Note) “m4” is a mass movable by thrust. Use 0.3 to 0.7 times the
g: Gravitational acceleration thrust (varies depending on the operating speed) as a guide for
actual use.
Dynamic Moment
M1
Z
υa Dynamic load FE
1.4
100
x υa x mn x g
υa 1
Dynamic moment
M1E
3
x FE x Z
M2E Dynamic moment M2E is not generated.
M3
M1E 1
mn x g M3E mn x g M3E
3
x FE x Y
FE FE Note) Regardless of the mounting orientation, dynamic
Y moment is calculated using the formulas above.
g: Gravitational acceleration, υa: Average speed
1060
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1061

With Protective Cover Series MY1W

Model Select the moment from within the range of
(mm) M1 M2 M3 m1 m2 m3
operating limits shown in the graphs. Note
16 6.0 3.0 1.0 18 7 2.1 that the maximum allowable load value
20 10 5.2 1.7 26 10.4 3 may sometimes be exceeded even within
25 15 9.0 2.4 38 15 4.5 the operating limits shown in the graphs.
MY1MW 32 30 15 5.0 57 23 6.6
Therefore, also check the allowable load MY1B
for the selected conditions.
40 59 24 8.0 84 33 10
50 115 38 15 120 48 14 MY1M
63 140 60 19 180 72 21
16 6.0 3.0 2.0 18 7 2.1 MY1C
20 10 5.0 3.0 25 10 3
25 15 8.5 5.0 35 14 4.2 MY1H
MY1CW 32 30 14 10 49 21 6
40 60 23 20 68 30 8.2
MY1HT
50 115 35 35 93 42 11.5
63 150 50 50 130 60 16
MY1W
The above values are the maximum allowable values for moment and load. Refer to each graph regarding the
maximum allowable moment and maximum allowable load for a particular piston speed. MY2C
Load mass (kg) MY2H

m1 MY3A
Caution MY3B
• The cylinder should be mounted
in m1 orientation if maximum MY3M
dustproofing is required.
m2
m3
Moment (N·m)
L2
L1
L3
Maximum Load Mass
Select the load from within the range of

<Calculation of guide load factor> limits shown in the graphs. Note that the
maximum allowable moment value may
1. Three factors must be considered when computing calculations for selection: (1) Maximum load mass,
sometimes be exceeded even within the
(2) Static moment, (3) Dynamic moment (at the time of impact with stopper).
operating limits shown in the graphs.
∗ To evaluate, use υa (average speed) for (1) and (2), and υ (collision speed υ = 1.4 υa) for (3).
Calculate mmax for (1) from the maximum allowable load graph (m1, m2, and m3), and Mmax for (2)
and (3) from the maximum allowable moment graph (M1, M2, and M3).
Sum of guide load factors Σα =

Load mass [m] Static moment [M] Note 1) Dynamic moment [ME] Note 2)
Maximum allowable load [mmax]
+ Allowable static moment [Mmax]
+ Allowable dynamic moment [MEmax]
≤1
Note 3) Depending on the shape of the workpiece, multiple moments may occur. When this happens, the sum of the load factors (Σα) is the total
of all such moments.
Use the following formulae to calculate dynamic moment when taking stopper impact into consideration.
,
F: Load (N) L1: Distance to the load s center of gravity (m)
υa: Average speed (mm/s) g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2)
M: Static moment (N·m)
υ = 1.4υa (mm/s) FE = 1.4 υa·g·m

Note 4)
u
Note 5) 100
∴ME = 1 FE·L1 = 0.05υa m L1 (N·m) m FE
3 D-
L1
ME
Note 4) 1.4
100
υa is a dimensionless coefficient for calculating impact force.
Note 5) Average load coefficient (= 13 ): This coefficient is for averaging the -X
maximum load moment at the time of stopper impact according to
service life calculations. Individual
-X
Technical
data
1061
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1062
Series MY1W

Maximum Allowable Moment: MY1MW
MY1MW/M1 MY1MW/M2 MY1MW/M3

200
50 20
40
100
30
10
20
50
40 5
30 4
10
MY1MW63 3
20 MY1MW63
MY1MW63
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
2 MY1MW50
MY1MW50 5 MY1MW50
4
10
MY1MW40 1 MY1MW40
MY1MW40 3
2 MY1MW32 MY1MW32
5
0.5
4 MY1MW32
0.4
3 MY1MW25
0.3 MY1MW25
1
2 MY1MW25 MY1M20
MY1MW20
MY1MW20 0.2
MY1MW20 0.5 MY1MW16

1 0.4 MY1MW16 0.1
MY1MW16 0.3
0.5 0.2 0.05

100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s)
Maximum Load Mass: MY1MW
MY1MW/m1 MY1MW/m2 MY1MW/m3

30
100
200
20
50
100
40
10
30
50
20
40 5
30 4
MY1MW63 3
Load mass (kg)
Load mass (kg)
Load mass (kg)
10 MY1MW63 MY1MW63
20
MY1MW50 2
MY1MW50 MY1MW50
MY1MW40 5
10 MY1MW40 MY1MW40
4
MY1MW32 1
3 MY1MW32 MY1MW32
5 MY1MW25
2 MY1MW25 MY1MW25
4
MY1MW20 0.5
3 MY1MW20 0.4 MY1MW20
MY1M16
MY1MW16 1
2 MY1MW16 0.3
MY1MW16
0.2
0.5
1
0.4
0.3 0.1
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
1062
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1063

Maximum Allowable Moment: MY1CW
MY1CW/M1 MY1CW/M2 MY1CW/M3

200
50 50
40 40
100
MY1B
30 30
20 20
MY1M
50
40
MY1C
10 MY1CW63 10 MY1CW63
30 MY1CW63 MY1H
MY1CW50 MY1CW50
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
MY1CW50
20
5 5
MY1HT
MY1CW40
4 4 MY1CW40
10
MY1CW40 MY1W
3 3
MY1CW32
2 2 MY1CW32
MY2C
MY1CW32 MY1CW25
5
4
MY2H
3 MY1CW25
1 MY1CW20 1 MY1CW25 MY3A
MY3B
2 MY1CW20 MY1CW16 MY1CW20
0.5 0.5
MY3M
MY1CW16
MY1CW16
1
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
Maximum Load Mass: MY1CW
MY1CW/m1 MY1CW/m2 MY1CW/m3

30
200
20
100 100
10
50 50
40 40
30 30 5
MY1CW63
4
Load mass (kg)
Load mass (kg)
Load mass (kg)
20 20
MY1CW50 MY1CW63
3
MY1CW40
MY1CW63 MY1CW50
10 MY1CW32 10 2
MY1CW50 MY1CW40
MY1CW25
MY1CW40 MY1CW32
5 MY1CW20 5
1
4 4 MY1CW32
MY1CW16 MY1CW25
3 3 MY1CW25
MY1CW20
2 2 MY1CW20 0.5
0.4 MY1CW16 D-
MY1CW16
1 1
0.3
-X
0.2 Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500 100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
-X
Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Technical
data
1063
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1064
Series MY1W
Cushion Capacity
<Air cushion>
Air cushions are a standard feature on ø16 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa ø32 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
mechanically jointed rodless cylinders.
2000 2000
The air cushion mechanism is incorporated
Collision speed (mm/s)

1500 1500
to prevent excessive impact of the piston Lu
nit
Lu
nit
1000 1000
at the stroke end during high speed Air Air
cus
operation. The purpose of air cushion, cus hio
hio n
500 n 500
thus, is not to decelerate the piston near 400 400
the stroke end. 300 300
cushions can absorb are within the air
cushion limit lines shown in the graphs. 100 100
<Stroke adjusting unit with shock 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100
absorber>
Use this unit when operating with a load or Load mass (kg) Load mass (kg)
speed exceeding the air cushion limit line,
the effective air cushion stroke range due ø20 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa ø40 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
to stroke adjustment. 2000 2000
L unit

1500 1500
Use this unit when the cylinder stroke is Lu
1000 1000 Air nit
outside of the effective air cushion range cus
hio
even if the load and speed are within the n
500 500
air cushion limit line, or when the cylinder 400 400
Lu
is operated in a load and speed range 300 nit 300
Air
above the air cushion limit line or below 200
cus
hio 200
the L unit limit line. n
100 100
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 2 3 4 5 10 20 50
Caution Load mass (kg) Load mass (kg)
1. Refer to the figure below when using
the adjusting bolt to perform stroke
adjustment. ø25 ø50
Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
When the effective stroke of the shock
absorber decreases as a result of stroke 2000 2000
adjustment, the absorption capacity
1500 1500
decreases dramatically. Secure the Lu Lu
1000 nit 1000 Air nit
adjusting bolt at the position where it Air cus
cus hio
hio n
protrudes approximately 0.5 mm from 500 n
500
the shock absorber. 400 400
300 300
Adjusting bolt 200 200
100 100
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 100
0.5
Load mass (kg) Load mass (kg)
Shock absorber ø63 Horizontal collision: P = 0.5 MPa
2. Do not use a shock absorber together 2000

with air cushion. 1500

L
1000 Air unit
cus
Air Cushion Stroke (mm) hio
n
Bore size (mm) Cushion stroke 500
400
16 12 300
20 15 200
25 15
32 19 100
2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100
40 24
50 30 Load mass (kg)
63 37
1064
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1065

Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting

Unit Holding Bolts (N·m) Precautions
A Be sure to read before handling.
16 0.7
L Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for
A Safety Instructions and pages 3 to MY1B
20 1.8 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch
L Precautions.
25
A
3.5
MY1M
L
A
Caution MY1C
32 5.8 Use caution not to get your hands
L
caught in the unit.
40
A
13.8 • When using a product with stroke
MY1H
L
adjusting unit, the space between the
50
A
13.8 slide table (slider) and the stroke MY1HT
L adjusting unit becomes narrow at the
63
A
27.5
stroke end, causing a danger of hands MY1W
L getting caught. When operating with the
protective cover removed (in the case of MY2C
installation, etc.), be careful not to get
Tightening Torque for Stroke Adjusting your hands caught in the unit.
Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts (N·m) MY2H
Bore size (mm) Unit Tightening torque Adjusting bolt Unit holding bolt MY3A
lock nut MY3B
25 L 1.2 Lock plate
holding bolt MY3M
32 L 3.3
40 L 3.3
Calculation of Absorbed Energy for Stroke

Lock plate
Adjusting Unit with Shock Absorber (N·m) Shock absorber
Horizontal Vertical Vertical <Fastening of unit>
collision (Downward) (Upward) The unit can be secured by evenly
tightening the four unit holding bolts.
Type of m
s υ m s
impact υ s
Caution
υ m
<Stroke adjustment with adjusting bolt>
adjusting unit fixed in an intermediate Loosen the adjusting bolt lock nut, and
adjust the stroke from the lock plate side
m·υ2
Kinetic energy 1 position.
E1 2 When the stroke adjusting unit is fixed in using a hexagon wrench. Retighten the
Thrust energy an intermediate position, slippage can lock nut.
F·s F·s + m·g·s F·s – m·g·s occur depending on the amount of energy
E2 <Stroke adjustment with shock absorber>
released at the time of an impact. In such Loosen the two lock plate holding bolts,
Absorbed energy
E E1 + E2 cases, the use of the adjusting bolt turn the shock absorber and adjust the
mounting brackets, available per made-to- stroke. Then, uniformly tighten the lock
Symbol order specifications -X416 and -X417, is
υ: Speed of impact object (m/s) plate holding bolts to secure the shock
m: Mass of impact object (kg) recommended. absorber.
F: Cylinder thrust (N) For other lengths, please consult with Avoid excessive tightening of the holding
g: Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2) SMC (Refer to the “Tightening Torque for bolts (except for ø16, ø20, ø50, and ø63).
s: Shock absorber stroke (m) Stroke Adjusting Unit Holding Bolts” (Refer to “Tightening Torque for Stroke
Note) The speed of the impact object is measured at values in the chart at the upper left corner Adjusting Unit Lock Plate Holding Bolts”
the moment of impact with the shock of this page.)
absorber. above left.)
Note)
Although the lock plate may slightly bend due to D-
tightening of the lock plate holding bolt, this
does not a affect the shock absorber and
locking function.
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1065
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1066
Series MY1쏔W
Model Selection 2
=7 # ,,6 ## #7 #)) !), ,# )6 6 #7 #6,
# )# $ #7 !,
1 Operating Conditions
Cylinder ····························MY1MW40-500 Mounting Orientation
K
Average operating speed a ······200 mm/s Wd+ - .
1. Horizontal
mounting
2. Wall
mounting

Mounting orientation ·······Horizontal mounting *
Wc+ /012- .

Wa+ "# ,# # & - .
1 3. Ceiling 4. Vertical

mounting mounting
* *

Wb+ 33041 - .
5 #6, !, $ ,6,# $ 7

##' $ # #7 (%
2 Load Blocking
Mass and Center of Gravity for Each Workpiece
"# $ %#

! 1

1

1

Wa !! !! !!

Wb !! !! !!

Wc !! !! !!
Wd !! !! !!

& ' (' ' )
3 Composite Center of Gravity Calculation

m1 & 5m
& > > > & 6.525 kg
X & 5-m x.
m

&
- > > > . & 138.5 mm
Y & 5-m y.
m

&
- > > > . & 29.6 mm
Z & 5-m z.
m

&
- > > > . & 37.4 mm
4 Calculation of Load Factor for Static Load
m1+
m! -$! $ 7 9m. & -. ::::::::::::::::::::::
m
0) $# = & !9m1max & 9 & 0.08

M1+ !#
M1 max -$! -. $ 7 9M1. & -;:!. :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: m
M1 & m1 g X & < & -;:!.

M
0) $# = & M19M1max & 9 & 0.15

P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1067


Y
M2: Moment
M2max (from 3 of graph MY1MW: M2) = 24 (N·m) ·····································································
m1
M3 = m1 x g x Y = 6.525 x 9.8 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 1.89 (N·m) MY1B
Load factor α3 = M2/M2max = 1.89/24 = 0.08 M2 MY1M
MY1C
5 Calculation of Load Factor for Dynamic Moment
MY1H
FE =
1.4
100
x υa x g x m = 1.4
100
x 200 x 9.8 x 6.525 = 179.1 (N) FE MY1HT
M1E
M1E: Moment MY1W
Z
M1Emax (from 4 of graph MY1MW: M1 where 1.4υa = 280 mm/s) = 42.1 (N·m) ··········
1 1
M1 MY2C
M1E = x FE x Z = x 179.1 x 37.4 x 10–3 = 2.23 (N·m)
3 3
Load factor α4 = M1E/M1Emax = 2.23/42.1 = 0.05
MY2H
M3
MY3A
M3E: Moment Y MY3B
M3Emax (from 5 of graph MY1MW: M3 where 1.4υa = 280 mm/s) = 5.7 (N·m)·························· FE
MY3M
1 1 M3E
M3E = x FE x Y = x 179.1 x 29.6 x 10–3 = 1.77 (N·m)
3 3
Load factor α5 = M3E/M3Emax = 1.77/5.7 = 0.31
6 Sum and Examination of Guide Load Factors

∑α = α1 + α2 + α3 + α4 + α5 = 0.67 ≤ 1
In an actual calculation, when the total sum of guide load factors ∑α in the formula above is more than 1, consider either decreasing the
speed, increasing the bore size, or changing the product series. This calculation can be easily made using the “SMC Pneumatics CAD
System”.
MY1MW/m1 MY1MW/M1 MY1MW/M2 MY1MW/M3

200
200 50 20
40
100
100 (1) (2)
30
(3) 10
20
50 (4) (5)
50 40 5
40 30 4
10
30 MY1MW63 3
20 MY1MW63
MY1MW63 MY1MW63
Load mass (kg)
MY1MW50
Moment (N·m)
2
Moment (N·m)
Moment (N·m)
20 MY1MW50 MY1MW50
5
MY1MW50 4
10
MY1MW40 1 MY1MW40
MY1MW40 MY1MW40 3
10
MY1MW32 2 MY1MW32 MY1MW32

5
0.5
4 MY1MW32
5 MY1MW25 0.4
4 3 MY1MW25
0.3 MY1MW25
3
MY1MW20
2 MY1MW25
1
0.2
MY1MW20 D-
MY1MW16 MY1MW20
2
MY1MW20
1
0.5
0.4 MY1MW16 0.1
MY1MW16
-X
MY1MW16 0.3
1
Individual
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
0.5
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
0.2
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
0.05
100 200 300 400 500 1000 1500
-X
Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Piston speed (mm/s) Technical
data
1067
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1068
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder with Protective Cover

Slide Bearing Guide Type, Cam Follower Guide Type
Series MY1
ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
W
How to Order
MY1 M W K 32 300 M9BW

Guide type
M Slide bearing guide type
C Cam follower guide type Auto switch
Suffix for stroke
Port thread type adjusting unit Nil Without auto switch
With protective cover (Built-in magnet)
Symbol Type Tube size Nil Both ends
Side seal M thread ø16, ø20 Applicable auto switches
Nil S One end
Nil None Rc ø25, ø32, vary depending on the bore
Note) “S” is available when size. Select an applicable one
K With side seal TN NPT ø40, ø50, stroke adjusting units
Note) Cylinders with side seal are ø63 are A and L.
referring to the table below.
available for ø16 to ø40.
TF G
Bore size Stroke adjusting unit Number of

16 16 mm
Piping Nil Without adjusting unit auto switches
20 20 mm Nil Standard type Cylinder stroke (mm) A With adjusting bolt Nil 2 pcs
G Centralized piping type Refer to “Standard Stroke” on
25 25 mm page 1069. L With low load shock absorber + Adjusting bolt S 1 pc
32 32 mm AL With one A unit and one L unit n “n” pcs
40 40 mm Shock Absorbers for L Unit
50 50 mm Bore size Made to Order Specifications
63 63 mm
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Unit no. For details, refer to page 1069.
L unit RB0806 RB1007 RB1412 RB2015
Applicable Auto Switch /Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator
Special Electrical Wiring

0.5 1 3 5 Pre-wired Applicable load
light
Type Perpendicular In-line

function entry (Output) DC AC connector
ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø40 ø50, ø63 ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø40 ø50, ø63 (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN)
— M9NV∗∗ — M9N∗∗
[Y69A] [Y59A] [—]
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
— 3-wire (PNP)
— M9PV∗∗ — M9P∗∗
[Y7PV] [Y7P] [—]
2-wire 12 V
— M9BV∗∗ — M9B∗∗ —
Solid state switch
[Y69B] [Y59B] [—]
3-wire (NPN)
— M9NWV∗∗ — M9NW∗∗
[Y7NWV] [Y7NW] [—]
Diagnostic IC circuit Relay
Yes
Grommet 24 V 5 V, 12 V —
indication
3-wire (PNP)
— M9PWV∗∗ — M9PW∗∗ PLC
(2-color [Y7PWV] [Y7PW] [—]
indication)
2-wire 12 V
— M9BWV∗∗ — M9BW∗∗ —
[Y7BWV] [Y7BW] [—]
Water 3-wire (NPN) — M9NAV∗∗ — M9NA∗∗
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
resistant 3-wire (PNP) — M9PAV∗∗ — M9PA∗∗
(2-color
2-wire 12 V
—
M9BAV∗∗
— M9BA∗∗ —
indication) [Y7BAL] [—] [—]
— — —
Reed switch
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
— 5V — A96 Z76 — — — IC circuit —
Yes
— Grommet — — — A93 — — — — —
100 V Relay
2-wire 24 V 12 V — — — — Z73 — — —
PLC
— — — A90 Z80
No
100 V or less — — — IC circuit

∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m······Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m······M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-M9 type cannot be mounted on ø40 of MY1CW and ø25 and ø40 of
3 m·······L (Example) M9NWL MY1MW. Select auto switches in brackets.
5 m·······Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Refer to page 1078 for details on other applicable auto switches than listed above.
1068
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1069

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Fluid Air
Operating pressure range MY1MW: 0.15 to 0.8 MPa; MY1CW: 0.1 to 0.8 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60°C MY1B
Cushion Air cushion
Lubrication Non-lube
MY1M
JIS Symbol
+1.8
1000 or less
Stroke length tolerance 1001 to 3000
0
+2.8
0
2700 or less +1.8 +2.8
0 ; 2701 to 3000 0 MY1C
Piping Front/Side port M5 x 0.8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Rc 3/8
port size Bottom port ø4 ø5 ø6 ø8 ø10 ø11 MY1H
MY1HT
Stroke Adjusting Unit Specifications
MY1W
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 MY2C
Unit symbol A L A L A L A L A L A L A L
RB RB RB RB RB RB RB MY2H
With 0806 With 0806 With 1007 With 1412 With 1412 With 2015 With 2015
Configuration adjusting adjusting adjusting adjusting adjusting adjusting adjusting
Shock absorber model
with with with with with with with MY3A
bolt adjusting bolt adjusting bolt adjusting bolt adjusting bolt adjusting bolt adjusting bolt adjusting
bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt bolt MY3B
Fine stroke adjustment range (mm) 0 to –5.6 0 to –6 0 to –11.5 0 to –12 0 to –16 0 to –20 0 to –25 MY3M
Stroke adjustment range When exceeding the stroke fine adjustment range: Utilize a made-to-order specifications “-X416” and “-X417”.
∗ Fine stroke adjustment range is applicable for one side when mounted on a cylinder.
RB RB RB RB Bore size (mm) 16 to 63

Model
0806 1007 1412 2015 Without stroke adjusting unit 100 to 1000mm/s
Max. energy absorption (J) 2.9 5.9 19.6 58.8 Stroke A unit 100 to 1000mm/s (1)
Stroke absorption (mm) 6 7 12 15 adjusting unit L unit 100 to 1500mm/s (2)
Max. collision speed (mm/s) 1500 Note 1) The air cushion capacity will be reduced when the stroke adjustment
range is increased by the adjusting bolt. When exceeding the air
Max. operating frequency (cycle/min) 80 70 45 25 cushion stroke ranges on page 1064, the piston speed should be 100
Spring Extended 1.96 4.22 6.86 8.34 to 200 mm per second.
force (N) Retracted 4.22 6.86 15.98 20.50 Note 3) Use at a speed within the absorption capacity range. Refer to page
∗ The shock absorber service life is different from that of the

MY1W cylinder depending on operating conditions. Refer to
the Specific Product Precautions for the replacement period.

(For details, refer to pages 1395 and 1565.)
Symbol Specifications Bore size Maximum manufacturable stroke
Standard stroke (mm)∗
—XB11 Long stroke type (mm) (mm)
—XC67 NBR rubber lining in dust seal band
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700
—X416 Holder mounting bracket I 16, 20, 25, 32
800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600 3000
—X417 Holder mounting bracket II 40, 50, 63 1800, 2000
∗ Strokes are manufacturable in 1 mm increments, up to the maximum stroke. However, when

exceeding a 2000 mm stroke, specify “-XB11” at the end of the model number. For details,
refer to the “Made to Order Specifications”.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1069
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1070
Series MY1W
Theoretical Output
(N)

(mm) (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
16 200 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
20 314 62 94 125 157 188 219 251
25 490 98 147 196 245 294 343 392
32 804 161 241 322 402 483 563 643
40 1256 251 377 502 628 754 879 1005
50 1962 392 588 784 981 1177 1373 1569
63 3115 623 934 1246 1557 1869 2180 2492
Mass
(kg)
Side support Stroke adjusting unit mass

MY1MW MY1CW
mass (per set) (per unit)
Bore size
(mm) Basic
Additional Additional
mass per Basic mass per A unit L unit
each 50mm each 50mm Type A and B
mass mass mass mass
of stroke of stroke
16 1.25 0.16 1.25 0.16 0.01 0.03 0.04
20 1.90 0.19 1.85 0.18 0.02 0.04 0.05
25 2.56 0.28 2.50 0.28 0.02 0.07 0.11
32 4.75 0.43 4.62 0.42 0.04 0.14 0.23
40 7.79 0.61 7.51 0.57 0.08 0.25 0.34
50 13.53 0.83 13.61 0.82 0.08 0.36 0.51
63 21.84 1.18 21.94 1.17 0.17 0.68 0.83
Calculation: (Example) MY1MW25-300A
· Basic mass ······························ 2.56 kg · Cylinder stroke··········300 st
· Additional mass ········ 0.28 kg per 50 st · 2.56 + 0.28 x 300 ÷ 50 + 0.07 x 2 ≅ 4.38 kg
· Mass of A unit ························· 0.07 kg
Option
Bore size
(mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Unit no.
A unit
L unit
Form and mounting direction of stroke adjusting unit

L unit H unit
Port Port

Bore size
Type (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

For detailed dimensions, refer to page 1076.
1070
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1071

Construction
MY1W
MY1B
MY1M
MY1C
MY1H
MY1HT
MY1W
MY1WK with side seal
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
MY3B
MY3M
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note ø16 ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63
1 Slide table Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
2 Cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
3 End plate Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
4 Belt clamp Special resin
5 Cover Slide plate Special resin MYMW-16- MYMW-20- MYMW-25- MYMW-32- MYMW-40- MYMW-50- MYMW-63-
6 unit Port cover Special resin (ø25 to ø40) Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke
7 Spacer Stainless steel (ø25 to ø40)
11 Rodless cylinder — MY1M/MY1C — — — — — — —
21 Seal guide A Special resin
22 Side Seal guide B Special resin
23 seal Slide plate Special resin MYMK-16-A MYMK-16-A MYMK-25-A MYMK-25-A MYMK-25-A — —
24 unit Spacer Stainless steel
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

No. Description Qty. ø16 ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63
12 Seal belt 1 MY16-16A-Stroke MY20-16A-Stroke MY25-16A-Stroke MY32-16A-Stroke MY40-16A-Stroke MY50-16A-Stroke MY63-16A-Stroke
13 Dust seal band Note) 1 MY16-16B-Stroke MY20-16B-Stroke MY25-16B-Stroke MY32-16B-Stroke MY40-16B-Stroke MY50-16B-Stroke MY63-16B-Stroke
20 Side seal assembly 2 MYMK-16-Stroke MYMK-20-Stroke MYMK-25-Stroke MYMK-32-Stroke MYMK-40-Stroke — —
14 Scraper 2
15 Piston seal 2
17 Tube gasket 2
19 O-ring 4 D-
Note) Two kinds of dust seal bands are available. Verify the type to use, since the part number varies depending on the treatment of the hexagon socket head set
screw #3 (Refer to the Construction of MY1M on pages 986 and 987.). -X
A Black zinc chromated MY-16B-Stroke B Nickel plated MY-16BW-Stroke
∗ Seal kit includes !4, !5, !6, !7 and !9. Order the seal kit based on each bore size. Individual
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). -X
When !2 and !3 are shipped as single units, a grease pack (10 g per 1000 strokes) is included.
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed. GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g) Technical
data
1071
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1072
Series MY1W
Dimensions: ø16, ø20
(LL) L
4 x MM depth M 4 x øB counterbore depth C
PA
YW
øLD through-hole bottom side J depth K
PB
QW
LW
PG Q+ Stroke
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
(Hexagon socket head plug) (Port) W
CH
LH
SS
NE
H
RR SS
HH
QQ
NH
RR
NC
M5 x 0.8
PP
M5 x 0.8 2 x 2 x M5 x 0.8
UU TT This port is not available for use. GA
(Port) (Hexagon socket head plug) TT UU (Hexagon socket head plug)
G
NW
GB
10
A N
Z + Stroke
M5 x 0.8
(Port)
(WW)
QQ
M5 x 0.8
XX (WW)
M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
PP
GA
XX
G
2 x M5 x 0.8
2 x M5 x 0.8 (Hexagon socket head plug)
VV VV
1.1
WX S
ø8.4
Bottom ported
2 x ø4 Y (Applicable O-ring)
Bore size (mm) A B C CH G GA GB H HH J K L LD LH LL LW M MM N NC NE NH

16 090 6.0 3.5 25 13.5 8.5 16.2 52 27.7 M5 x 0.8 10 110 3.6 38 35 84 6.0 M4 x 0.7 20 14 49.5 16.5
20 110 7.5 4.5 26 12.5 12.5 20.0 58 33.7 M6 x 1 12 130 4.8 39 45 88 7.5 M5 x 0.8 25 17 55.5 21.7
Bore size (mm) NW PA PB PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV W WW YW Z XX

16 56 40 94 3.5 07.5 153 9 48 11.0 2.5 15 14 10.0 102 13 54 180 30
20 60 50 100 4.5 11.5 191 10 45 14.5 5.5 18 12 12.5 110 14 58 220 32

(Mounting side should be machined to these dimensions.)
Bore size (mm) S WX Y Applicable O-ring
16 9 30 6.5 C6
20 6.5 32 8 C6
1072
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1073

Dimensions: ø25, ø32, ø40
(LL) L
PA 4 x MM depth M
4 x øB counterbore depth C
YW
øLD through-hole bottom side J depth K
MY1B
PB
QW
MY1M
LW
MY1C
PG Q + Stroke MY1H
P
(Hexagon socket head taper plug) P W MY1HT
(Port)
MY1W
CH
LH
RR1 SS
NE
RR2 SS
H
HH
QQ
Back port MY2C
NH
NH
NC
Back port (Refer to P. 1083.)
(Refer to
PP1
P 2xP
Cushion needle
P. 1083.) UU TT 10 (Port) G
TT UU
(Hexagon socket MY2H
P NW
2xP A GB MW head taper plug)
(Hexagon socket (Hexagon socket head taper plug) MY3A
head taper plug) Z + Stroke N MY3B
MY3M
WW
WW
P
(Hexagon socket
head taper plug)
XX
XX
P
(Hexagon socket
head taper plug) P P
(Port) (Port)
VV 2 x ZZ 2 x ZZ VV
S
1.1
WX
øD
Bottom ported (ZZ)
(Applicable O-ring)
2 x ød Y
Bore size (mm) A B C CH G GB H HH J K L LD LH LL LW M MM MW N NC NE NH

25 120 09 5.5 25.7 17 24.5 66 40.5 M6 x 1 09.5 142 5.6 38.7 49 100 10 M5 x 0.8 66 30 21 64 28
32 150 11 6.5 31.5 19 30.0 82 50 M8 x 1.25 16.0 172 6.8 44.2 64 122 13 M6 x 1 80 37 26 80 37
40 180 14 8.5 34.8 23 36.5 98 63.5 M10 x 1.5 15.0 202 8.6 47.2 79 138 13 M6 x 1 96 45 32 96 48
Bore size (mm) NW P PA PB PG PP1 PP2 Q QQ QW RR1 RR2 SS TT UU VV W WW YW Z ZZ XX

25 60 Rc1/8 060 112 7 12.7 12.7 206 16 46 18.9 17.9 5.1 15.5 16 16 122 11 070 240 Rc1/16 38
32 74 Rc1/8 080 134 8 15.5 18.5 264 16 60 22.0 24.0 4.0 21.0 16 19 144 13 088 300 Rc1/16 48
40 94 Rc1/4 100 150 9 17.5 20 322 26 72 25.50 29 .0 9.0 26.0 21 23 160 20 104 360 Rc1/8 54
Hole Size for Centralized Piping on the Bottom D-

(Mounting side should be machined to these dimensions.)
Bore size (mm) D d WX Y S Applicable O-ring -X
25 11.4 6 38 9 4 C9 Individual
32 11.4 6 48 11 6 C9 -X
40 13.4 8 54 14 9 C11.2
Technical
data
1073
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1074
Series MY1쏔W
Dimensions: ø50, ø63
MM M
(LL) L
PA B !" C
LD #$% "
J K
YW
QW
LW
PB
PG Q& '(
- . - .
) ! *+*%*"% , /*#! ( * * % # W
0
CH
LH
RR SS
NE
RR SS
H
HH
QQ
NH
NC
- . ! !% - .
PP
UU TT GA TT
- . GC 0 - .
UU
/*#! ( *
/*#! ( A
/*#! ( * * % #
G NW
* % #
* * % # GB
N
Z & '(
- .
WW
WW
/*#! (
* * % #
- .
/*#! ( - .
- .
XX
XX
* * % # 0

0
VV - . - . VV
/*#! ( * /*#! ( *
* % # * % #
S

WX

Bottom ported (ZZ)
Y (Applicable O-ring)

A B C CH G GA GB GC H HH J K L LD LH LL LW M MM N NC NE
50
63

NH NW PA PB PG PP Q QQ QW RR SS TT UU VV W WW YW Z XX
50
63

!!# % "
*!
!!

S WX Y Applicable O-ring
50
63

P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1075


With adjusting bolt
MY1W Bore size Stroke A h
E
EA
MY1B
EB
W
MY1M
MY1C
TT MY1H
MY1W50/63
MY1HT
MY1W
EC
EY
MY2C
Model E EA EB EC EY h TT W MY2H
MY1W16 14.6 7 30 5.8 39.5 3.6 5.4 (Max.11) 58
MY1W20 20 10 32 5.8 45.5 3.6 5 (Max.11) 58
MY3A
MY3B
MY1W25 24 12 38 6.5 53.5 3.5 5 (Max.16.5) 70
MY1W32 29 14 50 8.5 67 4.5 8 (Max.20)
MY1W40 35 17 57 10 83 4.5 9 (Max.25)
88
MY3M
104
MY1W50 40 20 66 14 106 5.5 13 (Max.33) 128
MY1W63 52 26 77 14 129 5.5 13 (Max.38) 152

MY1W Bore size Stroke L
TT
h h
E F
EA h
EB
W
F
Stroke adjustment (Shock absorber stroke) T S
unit
MY1W16/20
F
Shock absorber
MY1W50/63
EC
EY
(mm)
Model E EA EB EC EY F h S T TT W Shock absorber model
MY1W16 14.6 7 30 5.8 39.5 4 3.6 40.8 6 5.4 (Max.11) 58 RB0806 D-
MY1W20 20 10 32 5.8 45.5 4 3.6 40.8 6 5 (Max.11) 58 RB0806
MY1W25 24 12 38 6.5 53.5 6 3.5 46.7 7 5 (Max.16.5) 70 RB1007 -X
MY1W32 29 14 50 8.5 67 6 4.5 67.3 12 8 (Max.20) 88 RB1412
MY1W40 35 17 57 10 83 6 4.5 67.3 12 9 (Max.25) 104 RB1412 Individual
MY1W50 40 20 66 14 106 6 5.5 73.2 15 13 (Max.33) 128 RB2015 -X
MY1W63 52 26 77 14 129 6 5.5 73.2 15 13 (Max.38) 152 RB2015 Technical
data
1075
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1076
Series MY1W
Side Support
Side support A
MY-SA
2 x øG
2 x øH
E
F
C A
D B
Side support B
MY-SB
2xJ
2 x øH
E
C A
D B
Model Applicable cylinder A B C D E F G H J

MY-S16AB MY1W16 61 71.6 15 26 4.9 3 6.5 3.4 M4 x 0.7
MY-S20AB MY1W20 67 79.6 25 38 6.4 4 8 4.5 M5 x 0.8
MY-S25AB MY1W25 81 95 35 50 8 5 9.5 5.5 M6 x 1
MY-S32AB MY1W32 100 118 45 64 11.7 6 11 6.6 M8 x 1.25
MY1W40 120 142
MY-S40AB 55 80 14.8 8.5 14 9 M10 x 1.5
MY1W50 142 164
MY-S63AB MY1W63 172 202 70 100 18.3 10.5 17.5 11.5 M12 x 1.75
For long stroke operation, the cylinder tube MY1MW MY1CW
may be deflected depending on its own
mass and the load mass. In such a case, (kg) 200 (kg) 200
use a side support in the middle section. 190 190
The spacing (l) of the support must be no (2100)
180 180
more than the values shown in the graph
on the right. 170 170
m
160 160
150 150
140 140
(2400)
l 130 130
(1800)
120 120
Mass (m)
Mass (m)
110 110
MY1M
100 100 (2000)

m
W63
90 (1500) 90
MY1C
l
MY1
80 80
m (1600)
W63
70 70
MY1
MW5
MY1
60 (1300) 60
CW5
0
(1400)
MY
M
50 50
W40
MY
MY
l
0
l (1100)
1CW
40 40 (1200)
1M
MY
1C W
M
MYY CCWW 1616
30 (1000) 30
40
W3 5
MY 11MM
(1000)
1M 20
W3 55
11CC 2200
Caution
M
M 11CCWW
1M WW11
M
(900) (900)
Y
Y11
2
M
M
W2
20 20
Y
2
W22
YY
W 66
1. If the cylinder mounting surfaces are 10 10

not measured accurately, using a side 0 0
support may cause poor operation. 1000 2000 3000 4000 1000 2000 3000 4000
Therefore, be sure to level the cylinder (mm) (mm)
tube when mounting. Also, for long Support spacing (l) Support spacing (l)
stroke operation involving vibration and
impact, use of a side support is
shown in the graph.
2. Support brackets are not for mounting;
1076
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1077


MY1MW (Slide bearing guide type)
ø16, ø20 ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
MY1B
A B A B
MY1M
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (mm) MY1C
D-Z7/Z80
D-M9 D-M9V
Bore size D-M9W D-M9WV
D-A9 D-Y69/Y7PV D-Y59/Y7P MY1H
D-A9V D-Y7WV D-Y7W
(mm) D-M9AL D-M9AVL
D-Y7BAL
MY1HT
A B A B A B A B A B
16 74 86 74 86 70 90 — — — —
MY1W
20 94 106 94 106 90 110 — — — —
25 — — — — — — 139.5 80.5 139.5 80.5
MY2C
32 189.5 90.5 189.5 90.5 — — 184.5 95.5 184.5 95.5
40 — — — — — — 229.5 110.5 229.5 110.5
MY2H
50 283.5 116.5 — — — — — — 278.5 121.5
63 328.5 131.5 — — — — — — 323.5 136.5 MY3A
MY3B
Note 1) D-M9 type cannot be mounted on ø25 and ø40.
Note 2) Perpendicular electrical entry type and D-Y7BAL cannot be mounted on ø16, 20, 50 and 63. Consider using the in-line electrical entry
type. MY3M
Note 3) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
MY1CW (Cam follower guide type)

ø16, ø20 ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63
A B A B

D-Z7/Z80
D-M9 D-M9V
D-A9 D-Y69/Y7PV D-Y59/Y7P
Bore size D-M9W D-M9WV
D-A9V D-Y7WV D-Y7W
(mm) D-M9AL D-M9AVL
D-Y7BAL
A B A B A B A B A B
16 74 86 74 86 70 90 — — — —
20 94 106 94 106 90 110 — — — —
25 102 118 102 118 — — 97 123 97 123
32 132 148 132 148 — — 127 153 127 153
40 — — — — — — 157.5 182.5 157.5 182.5
50 283.5 116.5 — — — — — — 278.5 121.5
63 328.5 131.5 — — — — — — 323.5 136.5
Note 1) D-M9 type cannot be mounted on ø40.
Note 2) Perpendicular electrical entry type and D-Y7BAL cannot be mounted on ø16, 20, 50 and 63. Consider using the in-line electrical entry
type.
Note 3) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1077
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1078
Series MY1W
Note) Since the operating range is provided as a guideline including hysteresis, it cannot be guaranteed. (Assuming
Operating range approximately ±30% dispersion.) It may vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
MY1MW (Slide bearing guide type) (mm) MY1CW (Cam follower guide type) (mm)
Bore size Bore size
Auto switch model Auto switch model
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
D-A9/A9V 11 7.5 — — — — — D-A9/A9V 11 7.5 — — — — —
D-M9/M9V D-M9/M9V
D-M9W/M9WV 7.5 7.5 — 8.5 — 7 6 D-M9W/M9WV 7.5 7.5 7 8 — 7 6
D-M9AL/M9AVL D-M9AL/M9AVL
D-Z7/Z80 — — 12 12 12 11.5 11.5 D-Z7/Z80 — — 12 12 12 11.5 11.5
D-Y59/Y69 D-Y59/Y69
D-Y7P/Y7PV — — D-Y7P/Y7PV — —
5 5 5 5.5 5.5 5 5 5 5.5 5.5
D-Y7W/Y7WV D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-Y7BAL D-Y7BAL
D-M9 type cannot be mounted on ø25 and ø40. D-M9 type cannot be mounted on ø40.
Perpendicular electrical entry type and D-Y7BAL cannot be mounted on ø16, Perpendicular electrical entry type and D-Y7BAL cannot be mounted on ø16,
20, 50 and 63. Consider using the in-line electrical entry type. 20, 50 and 63. Consider using the in-line electrical entry type.
Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.
Bore size (mm) ø25 to ø63: M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V)L

Auto switch model
ø16, ø20 ø25 to ø63
D-M9/M9V
D-M9W/M9WV — BMG2-012
D-M9AL/M9AVL BMG2-012
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable. Refer to pages 1263 and 1371 for details.
For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1263 to 1371.
Type Model Electrical entry (Fetching direction) Features Applicable bore size
D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV —
Grommet (Perpendicular) ø25 to ø40
D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
Solid state auto switch
D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P —
Grommet (In-line) ø25 to ø63
D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
∗ For solid state auto switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to pages 1290 and 1292 for details.
1078
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1079

Mounting of Auto Switch & Installation of Lead Wire Cover (ø50, ø63)
Caution
Be sure to install a lead wire cover on the auto switches for size ø50
and ø63 cylinders.
Install a lead wire cover following the procedures provided below to prevent the lead
wire from interfering with the slider.
Lead wire cover is packaged together with size ø50 and ø63 cylinders equipped with MY1B
auto switches.
For ordering the lead wire cover separately, use the following part number: MY1M
MYM63GAR6386-1640 (Length: 2 m)
1. Auto switch mounting position MY1C
Up to 4 auto switches can be mounted on one side of the cylinder (total of 8
switches on both sides). MY1H
When multiple auto switches are used, be sure to use the lead wire groove and pull
the lead wires out from the edge of the cylinder. (Bold lines in Fig. (1) indicate lead
wires.) MY1HT
Lead wire
MY1W
Lead wire Lead wire Lead wire
cover cover cover cover
MY2C
MY2H
MY3A
Lead wire containment groove Lead wire containment groove MY3B
Fig. (1) Auto switch mounting position MY3M
2. How to mount auto switch/install lead wire cover

1) Insert and slide in the auto
switch from the side of the
cylinder and secure it with
the screw provided. (Refer
to Fig. (2).)
2) Cut the lead wire cover to
the desired length using a
cutter or tube cutter. (Refer
to Fig. (1).) M2.5 x 4l
3) First place the lead wires (Included with auto switch)
into the lead wire cover.
Then, install a lead wire
cover onto a cylinder body. Fig. (2) Auto switch mounting
(Refer to Fig. (3).)
4) Make sure that the lead
wires do not interfere with
the slide table at any stroke
range.
Lead wire cover
Fig. (3) Installation of lead wire cover
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
1079
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1080
Series MY1W
Selection Mounting
Caution Caution
1. When using a cylinder with long strokes, implement 2. When the cylinder is mounted from the top side or
an intermediate support. when strokes are to be adjusted by installing a
• When using a cylinder with long strokes, implement an stroke adjusting unit, the protective cover must be
intermediate support to prevent the tube from sagging and removed for these purposes.
being deflected by vibration or an external load. • For detailed assembly step, refer to page 1082.
Refer to the Guide for Side Support Application on page 3. Do not apply a strong impact or moment on the
1076. slide table (slider).
2. For intermediate stops, use a dual-side pressure • Since the slide table (slider) is supported by precision
control circuit. bearings, do not subject it to strong impact or excessive
• Since the mechanically jointed rodless cylinders have a moment when mounting workpieces.
unique seal structure, slight external leakage may occur. 4. When connecting to a load which has an external
Controlling intermediate stops with a 3 position valve cannot guide mechanism, use a discrepancy absorption
hold the stopping position of the slide table (slider). The mechanism.
speed at the restarting state also may not be controllable. • A mechanically jointed rodless cylinder can be used with a
Use the dual-side pressure control circuit with a PAB- direct load within the allowable range for each guide type,
connected 3 position valve for intermediate stops. however, align carefully when connecting to a load with an
3. Constant speed external guide mechanism.
• Since the mechanically jointed rodless cylinders have a Mount the external guide mounting brackets and floating
unique seal structure, a slight speed change may occur. For brackets in a place where the required degree of freedom for
applications that require constant speed, select an applicable the floating Y and Z axes can be secured.
equipment for the level of demand. The thrust transmission area of the floating bracket must be
4. Load factor of 0.5 or less fixed so that it does not partially contact the body.
• When the load factor is high against the cylinder output, it ∗Refer to the Coordinates and Moment in Model Selection on
may adversely affect the cylinder (condensation, etc.) and page 1060 for the details of floating Y and Z axes.
cause malfunctions. Select a cylinder to make the load factor 5. Do not mount cylinders as they are twisted.
less than 0.5. (Mainly when using an external guide) • When mounting, be sure for a cylinder tube not to be twisted.
5. Cautions on less frequent operation The flatness of the mounting surface is not appropriate, the
• When the cylinder is used extremely infrequently, operation cylinder tube is twisted, which may cause air leakage due to
may be interrupted in order for anchoring and a change the detachment of a seal belt, damage a dust seal band, and
lubrication to be performed or service life may be reduced. cause malfunctions.
6. Consider uncalculated loads such as piping, 6. Do not mount a slide table on the fixed equipment
cableveyor, etc., when selecting a load moment surface.
• Calculation does not include the external acting force of • It may cause damage or malfunctions since an excessive
piping, cableveyor, etc. Select load factors taking into load is applied to the bearing.
account the external acting force of piping, cableveyor, etc. Head cover Cylinder tube
7. Accuracy
• The mechanical jointed rodless cylinder does not guarantee
traveling parallelism. When accuracy in traveling parallelism
and a middle position of stroke is required, please consult
with SMC.
Slide table
Mounting Mounting with a slide table (slider)
Caution 7. Consult SMC when mounting in a cantilevered way.

• Since the cylinder body deflects, it may cause malfunctions.
1. To obtain the best results from the cover, horizontal Please consult with SMC when using it this way.
mounting is recommended.
• With horizontal mounting (shown below), the entry of dirt and Head cover Slide table
dust from the bottom of the cover is much less compared to
other mounting orientations, making it much more efficient.
Horizontal
mounting Cylinder tube
Mounting in a cantilevered way
1080
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1081
Series MY1W
Handling Operating Environment
Caution Caution
8. Fixed parts of the cylinder on both ends must have 1. Because of floating particles such as paper dust
at least 5 mm of contact between where the bottom and coolant mist that may enter the inside of the MY1B
of the cylinder tube and the equipment surface. cover.
• Since there is a gap between the bottom of the cover and MY1M
Head cover Slide table
cylinder tube, take precautions when operating cylinders in
environments where there is exposure to excessive amount MY1C
of floating particles, water/oil splash, or chip spattering. If
they enter inside the cover, malfunction may occur. MY1H
2. Carry out cleaning and grease application suitable
5 mm or 5 mm or
longer Cylinder tube longer for the operating environment. MY1HT
• Carry out cleaning regularly when using in an operating
environment in which the product is likely to get dirty.
9. Do not generate negative pressure in the cylinder After cleaning, be sure to apply grease to the top side of the
MY1W
tube. cylinder tube and the rotating part of the dust seal band.
• Take precautions under operating conditions in which Apply grease to these parts regularly even if not after MY2C
negative pressure is generated inside the cylinder by cleaning. Please consult with SMC for the cleaning of the
external forces or inertial forces. Air leakage may occur due slide table (slider) interior and grease application. MY2H
to separation of the seal belt. Do not generate negative
pressure in the cylinder by forcibly moving it with an external MY3A
force during the trial operation or dropping it with self-weight Service Life and Replacement Period of Shock Absorber MY3B
under the non-pressure state, etc. When the negative
MY3M
pressure is generated, slowly move the cylinder by hand and
move the stroke back and forth. After doing so, if air leakage
Caution
still occurs, please consult with SMC. 1. Allowable operating cycle under the specifications
10. Accuracy set in this catalog is shown below.
• The mechanical jointed rodless cylinder does not guarantee 1.2 million times RB08
traveling parallelism. When accuracy in traveling parallelism 2 million times RB10 to RB2725
and a middle position of stroke is required, consult with SMC. Note) Specified service life (suitable replacement period) is
the value at room temperature (20 to 25°C). The period
11. Cautions on less frequent operation may vary depending on the temperature and other
• When the cylinder is used extremely infrequently, operation conditions. In some cases the absorber may need to be
may be interrupted in order for anchoring and a change replaced before the allowable operating cycle above.
lubrication to be performed or service life may be reduced.
Handling
Caution
1. Do not unnecessarily alter the guide adjustment
setting.
• The adjustment of the guide is preset and does not require
readjustment under normal operating conditions. Therefore,
do not unnecessarily alter the guide adjustment setting.
However, series other than the MY1W series can be
readjusted and their bearings can be replaced. To perform
these operations, refer to the bearing replacement procedure
given in the instruction manual.
2. Avoid operation that causes negative pressure
inside the cylinder.
•Take precautions under operating conditions in which
negative pressure is increased inside the cylinder by external
forces or inertial forces. Air leakage may occur due to
separation of the seal belt.
3. Do not get your hands caught during cylinder D-
operation.
• For the cylinder with a stroke adjusting unit, the space -X
between the slide table and stroke adjusting unit is very
small, and your hands may get caught. When operating Individual
without a protective cover, be careful not to get your hands -X
caught. Technical
data
1081
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1082
Series MY1W
Assembly Procedure
1 Component check 3 Side seal installation procedures
Check the components. 1. Temporary cover installation
1) Remove the hexagon socket head cap screws and one of
the end plates.
2) Place the cover and temporarily secure it with the hexagon
socket button head bolts.
Hexagon socket head
Cover button bolt
Cylinder body
Side seal assembly

(Applies to models that come with side seal only)
Note) When auto switches are included with a cylinder order, they are
End plate
packaged together with the cylinder.
2 Body mounting procedures

1. Removal of cover
Remove the hexagon socket head button bolts and cover. Hexagon socket head cap screw
Hexagon socket button
head screw Cover 2. Side seal installation
Slide the side seal assembly into the place from one end of
the cylinder.
Stainless steel portions of the side seal assembly are
very sharp. Take extra precautions when handling.
Note) Move the slide table
to the end of the
insertion side.
2. Body mounting/adjustment
Mount the cylinder body. Side seal
assembly
For cylinders with protective cover only (i.e., without side
Long
seal), reinstall the cover after the cylinder is mounted and

Short
adjusted. (Refer to Step 3 -3 “Cover installation”.) Head cover end

Note) Slide the side seal all the way
to the end of the head cover. Note) Make sure the side seal assem-
bly is facing in the right direc-
tion.
Note) The adjustment of the stroke adjusting unit (optional) should also be
done at this time.
1082
P1057-P1120-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:27 PM Page 1083
Series MY1W
Assembly Procedure
4 Side seal installation procedures (Continued) Hexagon socket button head screw
Cover tightening torque [N·m]
3. Cover installation
∗ Be sure to confirm Note 1) and Note 2). (When adjustment is
Bore Thread size Torque MY1B
ø16 to ø40 M3 0.6
not correctly done, it may cause malfunctions and parts ø50, ø63 M4 1.4
damage (cover collision). ) MY1M
1) The end plate is fixed with hexagon socket head cap screws.
2) The cover is fixed with hexagon socket button head screws.
End plate MY1C
Note 1) Do not move the end plate MY1H
upward inadvertently.
Hexagon socket head
cap screw
MY1HT
End plate tightening torque [N·m]
E
Bore Thread size Torque MY1W
ø16 M3 0.7 B C
ø20 M4 1.8 MY2C
ø25 M5 3.5 Note 2) If there is no gap (clearance) between
the slide table and cover (B, C and D,
ø32
ø40
M6 5.8
E in the drawing above) throughout MY2H
M6 5.8 the stroke range, loosen the hexagon
ø50 M8 14 socket head cap screw to fix the end MY3A
ø63 M10 28 plate, then retighten it after adjusting MY3B
the end plate position.
MY3M
Centralized Piping Port Variations
Caution
• Head cover piping connection can be freely selected to best suit different piping conditions.
Applicable cylinder Port variation

This port cannot be used.
MY1MW16, 20, 50, 63
(Except ø50)
MY1CW 16, 20, 50, 63 Side port Side port
L Front L L Front L
L
L
R R port R R port R R
L R R L
R R
Bottom port L L Bottom port
L R
MY1MW25, 32, 40
L L
MY1CW25, 32, 40
This port cannot be used.

Side port (Except ø32, ø40) Side port
Back L Front L L Front L Back

L L L L
port R R port R R port R R port
O-ring
L R R L D-
R R
Bottom port
Bottom port
L L
-X
Piping tube
Individual
L R -X
Technical
For bottom piping, refer to the figure above. Slide table operating direction
data
1083
P1379-P1498-E.qxd 08.10.3 2:52 PM Page 1405
Made to Order Common Specifications:

-XB11: Long Stroke Type
Symbol
6 Long Stroke Type -XB11
Stroke which exceeds the standard stroke length
Applicable Series
Series Description Model Type Note Vol. no. (for std model)
CX2 Slide unit CX2 Slide bearing type 3 From P. 464
CXWM Slide bearing type
CXW Slide unit 3 From P. 473
CXWL Ball bushing bearing type
CXS Standard type
CXS Dual rod cylinder 3 From P. 561
CXSW Double rod type
CY3 Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder CY3B Basic type 2 From P. 1174
MY1B Basic type
Mechanically jointed MY1M(W) Slide bearing type With cover (W) is also available.
MY1 2 From P. 956
rodless cylinder MY1C(W) Cam follower guide type With cover (W) is also available.
MY1H Linear guide type Except ø10
Mechanically jointed MY2C Cam follower guide type
MY2 2 From P. 1098
rodless cylinder MY2H/HT Linear guide type
MY3A Basic short type
Mechanically jointed
MY3 rodless cylinder MY3B Basic standard type 2 From P. 1121
MY3M Slide bearing type
CQ2 Compact cylinder CQ2AH Air-hydro type Except with rubber bumper 2 From P. 602
ML1 Hy-rodless cylinder ML1C Cam follower guide type 3 From P. 912
REA Sine rodless cylinder REA Basic type 3 From P. 935
How to Order
Standard model no. XB11
Long stroke type
∗ Enter a symbol for
stroke required.
Specifications: Same as standard type.
Stroke Range
Bore size Standard stroke Long stroke Bore size Standard stroke Long stroke
Series Series
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 2001 to 5000 10, 20, 30,
MY1B 100 to 2000 10, 15 75, 100, 125, 150
40, 50, 63, 80, 100 (Up to 3000 for ø10, ø16) 40, 50
CXSW
16, 20, 25, 32, 2001 to 5000 (3000 for ø16 10, 20, 30, 40,
MY1M(W) 100 to 2000 20, 25, 32 125, 150, 175, 200
40, 50, 63 only, 3000 for MY1MW) 50, 75, 100
16, 20, 25, 32, 2001 to 5000 (3000 for ø16
MY1C(W) 100 to 2000 CX2 15, 25 25 to 200 225, 250, 275, 300
40, 50, 63 only, 3000 for MY1CW)
601 to 1500 225, 250, 275, 300
MY1H 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 50 to 600
(CXWM16 to 25)
(1000 for ø16 to ø20 only) CXWM
225, 250 (CXWM32)
2001 to 5000 16, 20, 25, 32 25 to 200
MY2C 16, 25, 40 100 to 2000 225, 250, 275
(Up to 3000 for ø16)
CXWL (CXWL16 to 25)
601 to 1500
MY2H/HT 16, 25, 40 50 to 600 225 (CXWL32)
(Up to 1000 for ø16)
MY3A ML1 25, 32, 40 100 to 1000 1001 to 2000
MY3B 16, 25, 40, 63 100 to 2000 2001 to 3000
MY3M 2001 to 3000 (ø25 to ø40)
CY3B 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 100 to 1000
2001 to 5000 (ø50, ø63)
80, 90, 100, 110,
10 10 to 75 2001 to 4000 (ø25, ø32)
120, 125, 150
REA 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 200 to 1000 2001 to 5000 (ø40) -X
2001 to 6000 (ø50, ø63)
CXS 15 10 to 100 110, 120, 125, 150 Individual
(5), 10, 15, 20, -X
32, 40, 50, 63, 125, 150, 175,
110, 120, 125, 150, CQ2AH 80, 100
25, 30, 35, 40,
200, 250, 300
20, 25, 32 10 to 100 45, 50, 75, 100
175, 200
1405
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 3
Actuators
Precautions 1
Be sure to read this before handling.
Design / Selection
Warning
1. Confirm the specifications. 8. Design the circuitry to prevent sudden lurch-
Products represented in this catalog are designed only for use ing of driven objects.
in compressed air systems (including vacuum). When a cylinder is driven by an exhaust center type direction-
Do not operate at pressures or temperatures, etc., beyond the al control valve or when starting up after residual pressure is
range of specifications, as this can cause damage or malfunc- exhausted from the circuit, etc., the piston and its driven ob-
tion. (Refer to the specifications.) ject will lurch at high speed if pressure is applied to one side
Please contact SMC when using a fluid other than com- of the cylinder because of the absence of air pressure inside
pressed air made by pneumatic equipment (including vac- the cylinder. Therefore, select equipment and design circuits
uum). to prevent sudden lurching, because there is a danger of hu-
We do not guarantee against any damage if the product is man injury and/or damage to equipment when this occurs.
used outside of the specification range.
9. Consider the behavior of the cylinder in the
2. Confirm the applicable specification range. event of an emergency stop.
The cylinder specifications listed in this catalog apply to
standard strokes, including intermediate strokes. Please con- Devise a safe system so that if a person engages the emer-
sult with SMC for specifications on long strokes. There are al- gency stop, or if a safety device is tripped during a system
so some made-to-order products (-XB쏔/-XC쏔) for which malfunction such as a power outage, the movement of the cyl-
product specifications do not apply. inder will not cause a hazard to humans or damage the equip-
ment.
3. There is a danger of sudden action by cylin-
ders if sliding parts of machinery are twist- 10. Avoid synchronized operation using cylin-
ed, etc., and changes in forces occur. ders only.
Even if multiple pneumatic cylinders are initially set to the
In such cases, human injury may occur; e.g., by catching
same speed, their speed may vary due to changes in operat-
hands or feet in the machinery, or damage to the machinery
ing conditions. Therefore, avoid designs where a single load
itself may occur. Therefore, the machine should be designed
is moved by synchronizing multiple cylinder operations.
to operate smoothly and to avoid such dangers.
4. If there is a chance that the product will 11. Consider the action of the cylinder when re-
pose a hazard to humans, install a protec- starting after an emergency stop.
Devise a safe design so that the restarting of the cylinder will
tive cover. not pose a hazard to humans or damage the equipment. In-
If the moving portion of the product will pose a hazard to hu- stall manually controlled equipment for safety when the actua-
mans or will damage machinery or equipment, provide a con- tor has to be reset to the starting position.
struction that prevents direct contact with those areas.
12. Intermediate stops
5. Be certain that the secured portions will not When intermediate stopped position is performed with a 3 posi-
loosen. tion closed center type/double check valve type directional
Be certain to adopt a reliable connecting method if the cylin- control valve, it is difficult to achieve accurate and precise
der is used very frequently or if it is used in a location that is stopped positions due to the compressibility of air.
exposed to a large amount of vibration. Furthermore, since valves or cylinders are not guaranteed for
zero air leakage, it may not be possible to hold a stopped po-
6. There may be cases in which a speed reduc- sition for an extended period of time. Please contact SMC in
tion circuit or a shock absorber is required. case it is necessary to hold a stopped position for an extend-
If the driven object moves at high speeds or is heavy, it will be ed period.
unfeasible for only the cylinder’s cushion to absorb the shock.
Therefore, provide a speed-reduction circuit to reduce the cyl-
13. Do not disassemble the product or make
inder’s speed before the thrust is applied to the cushion, or an any modifications, including additional ma-
external shock absorber to dampen the shock. If these coun- chining.
termeasures are taken, make sure to take the rigidity of the It may cause human injury and/or an accident.
mechanical equipment into consideration.
14. Refer to the Auto Switches Precautions for
7. Consider the possibility of power source re- using with an auto switch.
lated malfunction that could occur. 15. When a cylinder is used in a clamping, sus-
For the equipment that rely on power sources such as com-
pressed air, electricity, or hydraulic pressure, adopt a counter- pending and lifting mechanism
measure to prevent the equipment from causing a hazard to There is a danger of workpieces dropping if there is a de-
humans or damage to the equipment in the event of malfunc- crease of thrust due to a drop in circuit pressure caused by a
tion. power outage, etc. Therefore, safety equipment should be in-
stalled to prevent damage to machinery and/or human injury.
3
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 4
Actuators
Precautions 2
Design / Selection Mounting
Caution Caution
1. Use the product within the limits of the maxi- 1. Be certain to align the rod axis with the load
mum usable stroke. and direction of movement when connect-
The piston rod will be damaged if operated beyond the maxi- ing.
mum stroke. Refer to the Cylinder Model Selection Procedure When not properly aligned, the rod and tube may be twisted,
for the maximum useable stroke. and damage may be caused due to wear on areas such as
2. Operate the cylinder component parts within the inner tube surface, bushings, rod surface and seals.
a range such that collision damage will not 2. When an external guide is used, connect the
occur at the stroke end. rod end and the load in such a way that
For applications where a piston with inertial force strikes a cover and there is no interference at any point within
stops at the stroke end, follow the cylinder model selection proce- the stroke.
dure (front matters 21 and 31), or select while taking into account the
allowable kinetic energy indicated in the each model specifications. 3. Do not scratch or gouge the sliding parts of
3. Use a speed controller to adjust the cylinder the cylinder tube or piston rod, etc., by strik-
drive speed, gradually increasing from a low ing or grasping them with other objects.
Cylinder bores are manufactured to precise tolerances, so
speed to the desired speed setting. that even a slight deformation may cause malfunction. Also,
4. Provide intermediate supports for long scratches or gouges, etc., in the piston rod may lead to dam-
stroke cylinders. aged seals and cause air leakage.
Provide intermediate supports for cylinders with long strokes 4. Prevent the seizure of rotating parts.
to prevent rod damage due to sagging of the rod, deflection of Prevent the seizure of rotating parts (pins, etc.) by applying
the tube, vibration and external loads, etc. grease.
In addition, thoroughly examine the possibility of buckling and
establish safety measures, such as constructing a guide out- 5. Do not use until you can verify that equip-
side of the product, etc. ment can operate properly.
5. If pressure is applied to the external cylinder Verify correct mounting by function and leak tests properly
after compressed air and power are connected following
parts, there is a possibility that air will get mounting or repair.
inside the cylinder from the rod seal section.
(Example: inside a chamber, etc.) 6. Cantilever fastening
If a cylinder is actuated at high speed when mounted with one
side fastened and one side free (basic type, flange type, direct
Mounting mount type), the bending moment may act on the cylinder due
to vibration at the stroke end, causing damage to the cylinder.
Warning In such cases, install a mounting bracket to suppress vibration
of the cylinder body, or reduce piston speed until the cylinder
1. Operation manual body does not vibrate at the stroke end.
Install the product and operate it only after reading the operation Also, use a mounting bracket when moving the cylinder body,
manual carefully and understanding its contents. Also, keep the or mounting a long stroke cylinder horizontally with one-sided
manual in a location where it can be referred to as necessary. fastening.
2. Ensure sufficient space for maintenance activities. 7. Be very careful when handling the product.
When installing the products, allow access for maintenance. Depending on the handling method, there is a risk that the
corners of the product will injure your hand or fingers, etc.
3. Tighten threads with the proper tightening
torque. 8. Mount an auto switch at the center of the
When installing the products, follow the listed torque specifi- operating range.
cations. Adjust the mounting position of an auto switch so that the pis-
ton stops at the center of the operating range (the range in
4. Do not place a magnetic object near the product. which a switch is ON). (The mounting position shown in the
The auto switch is a magnetic sensing type. If a magnetic ob- catalog indicates the optimum position at stroke end.) If
ject is placed close to it, the rotary actuator could operate sud- mounted at the end of the operating range (around the bor-
denly, which could pose a hazard to humans and damage the derline of ON and OFF), operation will be unstable or the ser-
machinery and equipment. vice life for reed switches may be reduced.
5. Do not perform additional machining to the product.
Additional machining to the product can result in insufficient
strength and cause damage to the product. This can lead to pos-
sible human injury and damage to the surrounding equipment.
6. Do not enlarge the fixed throttle by modify-
ing the pipe connectors.
If the hole diameter is enlarged, the product’s rotation speed
will increase, causing the shock force to increase and damage
to the product. As a result, it could pose a hazard to humans
and damage the machinery and equipment.
4
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 5
Actuators
Precautions 3
Piping Air Supply
Caution Warning
1. Refer to the Fittings and Tubing Precautions 1. Type of fluids
(Best Pneumatics No. 6) for handling one- Please consult with SMC when using the product in
touch fittings. applications other than compressed air.
2. Preparation before piping 2. When there is a large amount of drainage.
Before piping is connected, it should be thoroughly blown out Compressed air containing a large amount of drainage can
with air (flushing) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and cause malfunction of pneumatic equipment. An air dryer or
other debris from inside the pipe. water separator should be installed upstream from filters.
3. Wrapping of pipe tape 3. Drain flushing

When screwing piping or fittings into ports, ensure that chips If condensation in the drain bowl is not emptied on a regular
from the pipe threads or sealing material do not enter the pip- basis, the bowl will overflow and allow the condensation to en-
ing. Also, if pipe tape is used, leave 1.5 to 2 thread ridges ex- ter the compressed air lines. It causes malfunction of pneu-
posed at the end of the threads. matic equipment.
If the drain bowl is difficult to check and remove, installation of
Winding a drain bowl with an auto drain option is recommended.
direction For compressed air quality, refer to Best Pneumatics No. 5.
Ex
4. Use clean air.
po Pipe tape Do not use compressed air that contains chemicals, synthetic
se
ap oils including organic solvents, salt or corrosive gases, etc.,
pr
ox as it can cause damage or malfunction.
.2
thr
ea
ds
Caution
Cushion 1. When extremely dry air is used as the fluid,
degradation of the lubrication properties in-
Caution side the equipment may occur, resulting in
reduced reliability (or reduced service life)
1. Readjust using the cushion needle. of the equipment. Please contact SMC.
Adjust the cushion needle on the cover when the product is
put into service, based upon factors such as the size of the 2. Install an air filter.
load and the operating speed. When the cushion needle is Install an air filter upstream near the valve. Select an air filter
turned clockwise, the restriction becomes smaller and the with a filtration size of 5 μm or smaller.
cushion's effectiveness is increased. Tighten the lock nut se- 3. Take measures to ensure air quality, such
curely after adjustment is performed.
as by installing an aftercooler, air dryer, or
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a water separator.
fully closed condition. Compressed air that contains a large amount of drainage can
This could tear the seal. cause malfunction of pneumatic equipment such as valves.
Therefore, take appropriate measures to ensure air quality,
such as by providing an aftercooler, air dryer, or water sepa-
Lubrication rator.
4. Ensure that the fluid and ambient tempera-
Warning ture are within the specified range.
1. Lubricating the lube type cylinder If the fluid temperature is 5°C or less, the moisture in the cir-
cuit could freeze, causing damage to the seals and equipment
Install a lubricator in the circuit, and use class 1 turbine oil
malfunction. Therefore, take appropriate measures to prevent
(with no additive) ISO VG32. Do not use machine oil or spin-
freezing.
dle oil. If turbine oil is used, refer to the Material Safety Data
For compressed air quality, refer to Best Pneumatics No. 5.
Sheet (MSDS) of the oil.
2. Lubricating the non-lube type cylinder
The cylinder has been lubricated for life at the factory and can
be used without any further lubrication.
However, in the event that it is additionally lubricated, be sure
to use class 1 turbine oil (with no additive) ISO VG32. Do not
use machine oil or spindle oil.
Stopping lubrication later may lead to malfunction because
the new lubricant will displace the original lubricant. There-
fore, lubrication must be continued once it has been started.
If turbine oil is used, refer to the corresponding Material Safe-
ty Data Sheet (MSDS).
5
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 6
Actuators
Precautions 4
Operating Environment Maintenance
Warning Warning
1. Do not use in an atmosphere having corro- 1. Perform maintenance inspection according
sive gases, chemicals, sea water, water, wa- to the procedures indicated in the operation
ter steam, or where there is direct contact manual.
with any of these. If handled improperly, malfunction and damage of machinery
Long machined parts made by machining plated carbon steel or equipment may occur.
(end threads of piston rods, double-sided chamfer portion, tie 2. Maintenance work
rod threads etc.) are not plated. Consider a made-to-order If handled improperly, compressed air can be dangerous. As-
product (-XC6/-XC7) when using in an environment where sembly, handling, repair and element replacement of pneu-
rusting or corrosion will be a problem. Refer to each construc- matic systems should be performed by a knowledgeable and
tion on drawing on the rotary actuators material. experienced person.
2. Do not expose the product to direct sunlight 3. Drain flushing
for an extended period of time. Remove drainage from air filters regularly.
3. Do not use in a place subject to heavy vibra- 4. Removal of equipment, and supply/exhaust of
tion and/or shock. compressed air
4. Do not mount the product in locations where When components are removed, first confirm that measures
it is exposed to radiant heat. are in place to prevent workpieces from dropping, run-away
equipment, etc. Then, cut off the supply pressure and electric
5. Do not use in dusty locations or where water power, and exhaust all compressed air from the system using
or oil, etc., splash on the equipment. the residual pressure release function.
Use the heavy duty scraper type (-XC4) in situations where When machinery is restarted, proceed with caution after
there is a lot of dust. Use a water resistant cylinder when confirming that appropriate measures are in place to prevent
there is splashing or spraying of a liquid. cylinders from sudden movement.
6. When using auto switches, do not operate in
an environment with strong magnetic fields.
7. If a shock absorber is attached to an actua-
tor, read the Specific Product Precautions
for the shock absorber.
8. A decrease in grease base oil may be accel-
erated by the properties of compressed air
used in pneumatic equipment, the external
environment, or operating conditions, etc.,
and the resulting drop in lubricating perfor-
mance may have an effect on equipment
service life.
Caution
1. Internal lubricant and grease base oil may
seep out of the cylinder depending on oper-
ating conditions. Please consult with SMC in
cases where a particularly clean environ-
ment is required.
6
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 8
Auto Switches
Precautions 1
Design / Selection
Warning Caution
1. Confirm the specifications. 2. Keep wiring as short as possible.
Read the specifications carefully and use this product appro- <Reed>
priately. The product may be damaged or malfunction if it is As the length of the wiring to a load gets longer, the rush cur-
used outside the specification range for current load, voltage, rent at switching ON becomes greater, and this may shorten
temperature or impact. the product’s life. (The switch will stay ON all the time.)
We do not guarantee against any damage if the product is 1) Use a contact protection box when the wire length is 5 m or
used outside of the specification range. longer.
2. Cautions for use in an interlock circuit 2) Even if an auto switch has a built-in contact protection cir-
When an auto switch is used for an interlock signal requiring cuit, when the wiring is more than 30 m long, it is not able
high reliability, devise a double interlock system to avoid trou- to adequately absorb the rush current and its life may be
ble by providing a mechanical protection function, or by also reduced. It is again necessary to connect a contact protec-
using another switch (sensor) together with the auto switch. tion box in order to extend its life. Please consult with SMC
Also, perform periodic maintenance and confirm proper oper- in this case.
ation. <Solid state>
3. Do not make any modifications (including 3) Although wire length should not affect switch function, use
exchanging the printed circuit boards) to the a wire 100 m or shorter.
If the wiring is longer it will likely increase noise although
product. the length is less than 100 m.
It may cause human injuries and accidents. When the wire length is long, we recommend the ferrite
core is attached to the both ends of the cable to prevent ex-
cess noise.
Caution A contact protection box is not necessary for solid state
switches due to the nature of this product construction.
1. Pay attention to the length of time that a
switch is ON at an intermediate stroke posi- 3. Do not use a load that generates surge vol-
tion. tage. If a surge voltage is generated, the dis-
When an auto switch is placed at an intermediate position of charge occurs at the contact, possibly re-
the stroke and a load is driven at the time the piston passes, sulting in the shortening of product life.
the auto switch will operate, but if the speed is too great the If driving a load such as a relay that generates a surge vol-
operating time will be shortened and the load may not operate tage,
properly. The maximum detectable piston speed is:
<Reed>
Auto switch operating range (mm) Use an auto switch with built-in contact protection circuit or
V (mm/s) = x 1000 use a contact protection box.
Time load applied (ms)
<Solid state>
In cases of high piston speed, the use of an auto switch (D- Use a built-in surge absorbing element type device.
F5NTL, F7NTL, G5NTL, M5NTL, M5PTL) with a built-in OFF
delay timer (≈ 200 ms) makes it possible to extend the load 4. Take precautions when multiple cylin-
operating time. ders/actuators are used close together.
The wide-range detection type D-G5NBL (operating range 35 When multiple auto switch cylinders/actuators are used in
to 50 mm) may also be useful, depending on the application. close proximity, magnetic field interference may cause the
Please consult with SMC for other models. auto switches to malfunction. Maintain a minimum cylinder
separation of 40 mm. (When the allowable interval is specified
for each cylinder series, use the indicated value.)
The auto switches may malfunction due to the interference
from the magnetic fields.
Use of a magnetic screen plate (MU-S025) or commercially
available magnetic screen tape can reduce the interference of
magnetic force.
8
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 9
Auto Switches
Precautions 2
Design / Selection
Caution
5. Pay attention to the internal voltage drop of 9. Limitations of detectable positioning
the auto switch. When using certain mounting brackets, the surface and posi-
<Reed> tion where an auto switch can be mounted maybe restricted
1) Auto switch with an indicator light (Except D-A56, A76H, due to physical interference. For example, when using some
A96, A96V, C76, E76A, Z76) bracket types the auto switch cannot be surface mounted at the
bottom side of foot bracket, etc.
• If auto switches are connected in series as shown below, Select the set position of the auto switch so that it does not in-
take note that there will be a large voltage drop because terfere with the mounting bracket of the cylinders/actuators
of internal resistance in the light emitting diodes. (Refer to (such as trunnion or reinforcement ring).
the internal voltage drop in the auto switch specifications.)
[The voltage drop will be “n” times larger when “n” auto 10. Use the cylinder and auto switch in proper
switches are connected.] combination.
Even though an auto switch operates normally, the load The auto switch is pre-adjusted to activate properly for an auto-
may not operate. switch-capable SMC cylinder/actuator.
Load
If the auto switch is mounted improperly, used for another
brand of cylinders/actuators or used after the alternation of the
• In the same way, when operating under a specified vol- machine installation, the auto switch may not activate properly.
tage, although an auto switch may operate normally, the
load may not operate. Therefore, the formula below
should be satisfied after confirming the minimum operat- Mounting / Adjustment
ing voltage of the load.
Supply
–
Internal voltage
voltage drop of auto switch
>
Minimum operating
voltage of load
Caution
2) If the internal resistance of a light emitting diode causes a
1. Do not drop or bump.
problem, select an auto switch without an indicator light (D- Do not drop, bump or apply excessive impacts (300 m/s2 or
A6쏔, A80, A80H, A90, A90V, C80, R80, 90, E80A, Z80). more for reed auto switches and 1000 m/s2 or more for solid
state auto switches) while handling. Although the body of the
<Solid state/2-wire type> auto switch may not be damaged, the inside of the auto switch
3) Generally, the internal voltage drop will be greater with a 2- could be damaged and cause malfunction.
wire solid state auto switch than with a reed auto switch.
Take the same precautions as in 1). 2. Observe the proper tightening torque for
Also, take note that a 12 VDC relay is not applicable. mounting an auto switch.
6. Pay attention to leakage current. When an auto switch is tightened beyond the range of tighten-
ing torque, auto switch mounting screws, auto switch mounting
<Solid state/2-wire type>
brackets or auto switch may be damaged.
Current (leakage current) flows to the load to operate the in- On the other hand, tightening below the range of tightening tor-
ternal circuit even when in the OFF state. que may allow the auto switch to slip out of position.
Operating current of load (OFF condition) > Leakage current 3. Do not carry a cylinder by the auto switch
If the criteria given in the above formula are not met, it will not lead wires.
reset correctly (stays ON). Use a 3-wire switch if this specifi- Never carry a cylinder by its lead wires. This may not only
cation will not be satisfied. cause broken lead wires, but it may cause internal elements of
Moreover, leakage current flow to the load will be “n” times the auto switch to be damaged by the stress.
larger when “n” auto switches are connected in parallel.
4. Fix the auto switch with appropriate screw
7. Ensure sufficient clearance for maintenance installed on the switch body. If using other
activities. screws, auto switch may be damaged.
When designing an application, be certain to allow sufficient
clearance for maintenance.
8. When multiple auto switches are required.
“n” indicates the number of auto switches which can be physi-
cally mounted on the cylinders/actuators. Detection intervals
depends on the auto switch mounting structure and set posi-
tion, therefore some required interval and set positions may
not be available.
9
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 10
Auto Switches
Precautions 3
Wiring
Caution
1. Confirm proper insulation of wiring. 6. Avoid incorrect wiring.
Be certain that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with <Reed>
other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between termi- A 24 VDC auto switch with indicator light has polarity. The
nals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow into brown lead wire or terminal No. 1 is (+), and the blue lead wire
a switch. or terminal No. 2 is (–).
2. Do not wire with power lines or high voltage [For D-97, (+) is on the no-displayed side, (–) is on the black
lines. line side.]
1) If connections are reversed, an auto switch will operate,
Wire separately from power lines or high voltage lines, avoid-
however, the light emitting diode will not light up.
ing parallel wiring or wiring in the same conduit with these
Also, take note that a current greater than that specified will
lines. Control circuits containing auto switches may malfunc-
damage a light emitting diode and it will no longer operate.
tion due to noise from these other lines.
Applicable model:
3. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead D-A73, A73H, A73C, C73, C73C, E73A, Z73
wires. D-R73, R73C, 97, 93A, A93, A93V
D-A33, A34, A33A, A34A, A44, A44A
Broken lead wires will result from repeatedly applying bending
D-A53, A54, B53, B54
stress or stretching force to the lead wires.
Stress and tensile force applied to the connection between 2) When using a 2-color indicator type auto switch (D-A79W,
the cable and auto switch increases the possibility of discon- A59W and B59W), the auto switch will constantly remain
nection. ON if the connections are reversed.
Fix the cable in the middle so that it is not movable in the area <Solid state>
where it connects with the auto switch. 1) If connections are reversed on a 2-wire type auto switch,
4. Be certain to connect the load before power the auto switch will not be damaged if protected by a pro-
tection circuit, but the auto switch will always stay in an ON
is applied. state. However, it is still necessary to avoid reversed con-
<2-wire type> nections, since the auto switch could be damaged by a
If the power is turned ON when an auto switch is not connec- load short circuit in this condition.
ted to a load, the auto switch will be instantly damaged be-
2) If connections are reversed (power supply line + and power
cause of excess current (short circuit).
supply line –) on a 3-wire type auto switch, the auto switch
It is the same as when the 2-wire brown lead wire (+, output)
will be protected by a protection circuit. However, if the
is directly connected to the (+) power supply terminal.
power supply line (+) is connected to the blue wire and the
5. Do not allow short-circuit of loads. power supply line (–) is connected to the black wire, the
<Reed> auto switch will be damaged.
If the power is turned ON with a load in a short circuited con- 7. When the cable sheath is stripped, confirm
dition, the auto switch will be instantly damaged because of the stripping direction. The insulator may be
excess current flow into the switch.
split or damaged depending on the direc-
<Solid state>
tion. (D-M9쏔 only)
All models of D-J51, G5NB and PNP output type auto
switches do not have built-in short circuit protection circuits.
If a load is short circuited, the auto switch will be instantly
damaged as in the case of reed auto switches.
Take special care to avoid reverse wiring with the brown pow-
er supply line and the black output line on 3-wire type auto
switches.
Recommended Tool
Description Model
Wire stripper D-M9N-SWY
* Stripper for a round cable (ø2.0) can
be used for a 2-wire type cable.
10
P0003-P0012-E.qxd 08.10.2 3:54 PM Page 11
Auto Switches
Precautions 4
Operating Environment
Warning Caution
1. Never use in an atmosphere of explosive 7. Avoid accumulation of iron waste or close
gases. contact with magnetic substances.
The structure of auto switches is not intended to prevent ex- When a large amount of iron waste such as machining chips
plosion. Never use in an atmosphere with an explosive gas or spatter is accumulated, or a magnetic substance (some-
since this may cause a serious explosion. thing attracted by a magnet) is brought into close proximity
Please contact SMC concerning ATEX compliant products. with a cylinder with auto switches, or an actuator, it may
cause the auto switch to malfunction due to a loss of the mag-
netic force inside the cylinder/actuator.
Caution 8. Please contact SMC concerning water resis-
1. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field tance, elasticity of lead wires, usage at weld-
is generated. ing sites, etc.
Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside cylinders/ac-
tuators will become demagnetized. (Please consult with SMC
9. Do not use in direct sunlight.
if a magnetic field resistant auto switch can be used.) 10. Do not mount the product in locations where
2. Do not use in an environment where the it is exposed to radiant heat.
auto switch will be continually exposed to
water. Maintenance
Although auto switches satisfy IEC standard IP67 construction
(JIS C 0920: waterproof construction) except some models
(D-A3쏔, A44쏔, G39쏔, K39쏔, RNK, RPK) do not use auto Warning
switches in applications where continually exposed to water 1. Removal of equipment, and supply/exhaust
splash or spray. Poor insulation or swelling of the potting resin
inside auto switches may cause malfunction. of compressed air
Before any machinery or equipment is removed, first ensure
3. Do not use in an environment with oil or that the appropriate measures are in place to prevent the fall
chemicals. or erratic movement of driven objects and equipment, then cut
Please consult with SMC if auto switches will be used in an off the electric power and reduce the pressure in the system
environment with coolant, cleaning solvent, various oils or to zero. Only then should you proceed with the removal of any
chemicals. If auto switches are used under these conditions machinery and equipment.
for even a short time, they may be adversely affected by im- When machinery is restarted, proceed with caution after con-
proper insulation, malfunction due to swelling of the potting firming that appropriate measures are in place to prevent ac-
resin, or hardening of the lead wires. tuators from moving suddenly.
4. Do not use in an environment with tempera-
ture cycles. Caution
Please consult with SMC if auto switches are used where 1. Perform the following maintenance periodi-
there are temperature cycles other than normal temperature
changes, as there may be adverse effects inside the auto cally in order to prevent possible danger
switches. due to unexpected auto switch malfunction.
5. Do not use in an environment where there is 1) Secure and tighten auto switch mounting screws.
If screws become loose or the mounting position is disloca-
excessive impact shock. ted, retighten them after readjusting the mounting position.
<Reed> 2) Confirm that there is no damage to lead wires.
When excessive impact (300 m/s2 or more) is applied to a To prevent faulty insulation, replace auto switches or repair
reed auto switch during operation, the contact point will mal- lead wires, etc., if damage is discovered.
function and generate or cut off a signal momentarily (1 ms or 3) Confirm the lighting of the green light on the 2-color indica-
less). Please consult with SMC if a solid state auto switch can tor type auto switch.
be used according to the environment. Confirm that the green LED is on when stopped at the es-
6. Do not use in an area where surges are gen- tablished position. If the red LED is on, the mounting posi-
erated. tion is not appropriate. Readjust the mounting position until
the green LED lights up.
<Solid state>
When there are units (solenoid type lifter, high frequency in-
duction furnace, motor, radio equipment etc.) which generate
a large amount of surge in the area around cylinders/actua-
tors with solid state auto switches, this may cause deteriora-
tion or damage to the auto switch’s internal circuit elements.
Avoid sources of surge generation and disorganized lines.
11
M44-M56-E.qxd 08.10.6 6:03 PM Page M54
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage.
These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or
“Danger.” They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International
Standards (ISO/IEC), Japan Industrial Standards (JIS)∗1) and other safety regulations∗2).
∗ 1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
ISO 10218-1992: Manipulating industrial robots -Safety.
JIS B 8370: General rules for pneumatic equipment.
JIS B 8361: General rules for hydraulic equipment.
JIS B 9960-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
JIS B 8433-1993: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety.
etc.
∗ 2) Labor Safety and Sanitation Law, etc.
Caution: Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.

Warning: Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Danger : In extreme conditions, there is a possibility of serious injury or loss of life.
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment
or decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be
decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results.
The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined
its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its
latest catalog information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the
equipment.
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment.
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or
equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced.
3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed.
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or
runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed.
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power
from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products
carefully.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction.
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to
be used in any of the following conditions.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military,
medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits,
clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard
specifications described in the product catalog.
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis.
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical protective
function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
Front matter 54
M44-M56-E.qxd 08.10.6 6:04 PM Page M55
Safety Instructions
Caution
The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing industries.
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange specifications or a contract
if necessary. If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements

The product used is subject to the following “Limited Warranty and Disclaimer” and “Compliance
Requirements”. Read and accept them before using the product.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer

1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is deliv-
ered.∗3)
Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please
consult your nearest sales branch.
2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility,
a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage
incurred due to the failure of the product.
3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers
noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
∗ 3) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad or failure due to the
deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.
Compliance Requirements
When the product is exported, strictly follow the laws required by the Ministry of Economy, Trade
and Industry (Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law).
Front matter 55

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder Series MY1 Technical Overview

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder Series MY1 Technical Overview

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P0943-P1056-E.qxd 08.10.

3 2:19 PM Page 943

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder

Series MY1HT MY3M

Linear guide type

Cam follower guide type

Basic type Slide bearing type

Cam follower guide type Linear guide type

Stroke availability Centralized piping

Basic type MY1 B10 30 Linear guide type MY1 H10

bracket, the height 20

Uses two linear guides. MY3M

Maximum load mass of 320 kg. ( 63)

End lock type introduced Lock pin

to series MY1H. Allows fine stroke control

Same dimensions as D-

Standards for Tentative Model Selection

Graphs for related M2 :

Selection Flow Chart

Tentative Selection of Cylinder Model

Select a guide suitable

Load mass NG Select larger cylinder size.

Determination of NG Select larger cylinder size.

NG Type L NG Type H NG External NG

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder Series MY1

Types of Moment Applied to Rodless Cylinders

M3 Static load (m) m1 m2 m3 m4 Note)

M2E Dynamic moment M2E is not generated.

Calculation of Guide Load Factor

Wb 4.35 kg 150 mm 0 mm 42.5 mm

3. Composite Center of Gravity Calculation

4. Calculation of Load Factor for Static Load

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder Series MY1

M3 max (from (3) of graph MY1H/M3) = 38.7 (N·m) ······································································

Equivalent load FE at impact

6. Sum and Examination of Guide Load Factors

Load Mass Allowable Moment

Series MY1B Prior to Use

Maximum Load Mass

Σα = Maximum allowable load [mmax] + Allowable static moment [Mmax] +

2. Reference formula [Dynamic moment at impact]

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder

MY1B/M1 MY1B/M2 MY1B/M3

Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s Piston speed mm/s

MY1B/m1 MY1B/m2 MY1B/m3

Calculation of Guide Load Factor

For actual examples of calculation for each orientation,

3. Calculation of Load Factor for Static Load

M2 max (from (3) of graph MY1B/M2) = 1.6 (N·m)·········································································

Load factor α3 = M2/M2 max = 0.59/1.6 = 0.37 M2

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder

4. Calculation of Load Factor for Dynamic Moment

Equivalent load FE at impact

5. Sum and Examination of Guide Load Factors MY3M

Load Mass Allowable Moment

MY1B/m1 MY1B/M1 MY1B/M2 MY1B/M3

20 MY1B100 20 (2) MY1B63 MY1B63

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder

Basic type MY1B 20 300 M9BW

80 80 mm Nil Without adjusting unit

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)

Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder

Shock Absorber Specifications Piston Speed